inst guide - sap erp ehp5 - windows - db2 (abap)

196
Installation Guide SAP ERP 6.0 Including SAP Enhancement Package 5 - Technical Usage “Central Applications” ABAP on Windows: IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Based on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Including Enhancement Package 2 Target Audience System Administrators Technical Consultants PUBLIC Document version: 1.0 – 2010-12-20

Upload: ngoc-vu-tuan

Post on 18-Apr-2015

214 views

Category:

Documents


6 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Installation GuideSAP ERP 6.0 Including SAP Enhancement Package 5 - Technical Usage “Central Applications” ABAP on Windows: IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and WindowsBased on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Including Enhancement Package 2

Target Audience ■ System Administrators ■ Technical Consultants

PUBLICDocument version: 1.0 – 2010-12-20

Page 2: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

About this Installation Guide

SAP System Installation

SAP system installations should only be performed by SAP Technical Consultants certified for your

operating system, your database, and the SAP system that you are installing

SAP Installation Tool

You must only use the SAP installation tools according to the instructions and for the purposes

described in the SAP installation document. Improper use of the SAP installation tools can damage files

and systems already installed.

Downward Compatibility of Databases

For downward-compatible releases of DB/OS platforms for SAP products, SAP plans to regularly release

the newest database (DB) and operating-system (OS) versions of SAP products. These releases are

downward-compatible with earlier SAP system releases.

Note that for already shipped SAP components, we only support the installation for database versions

proposed by the installation tool. Therefore, you must install an SAP component or perform a system

copy using a downward-compatible database. That is, you either install the component with the old

proposed database version or you upgrade the old database version to the downward-compatible new

version.

2/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 3: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Document History

CAUTION

Before you start the implementation, make sure you have the latest version of this document.

You can find the latest version at the following location:http://service.sap.com/erp-inst.

The following table provides an overview of the most important document changes.

Version Date Description

1.0 2010-12-20 Initial Version

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 3/196

Page 4: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.1 New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1.2 SAP Notes for the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.3 How to Use This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1 Central System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.2 Distributed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.3 High Availability System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.4 Dialog Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.5 Host Agent as a Separate Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 3 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.1 Planning Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3.2.1 Running the Prerequisite Checker in Standalone Mode

(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.2.2 Requirements for a Central System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.2.3 Requirements for a Distributed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.2.4 Requirements for a High-Availability System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.2.5 Requirements for the Dialog Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.2.6 Requirements for the Host Agent as a Separate Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.3 Planning User and Access Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.5 Domain or Local Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.6 Setup of Database Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.6.1 Base Directories for the Database Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3.6.2 Users and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.6.3 Directory Structure of the New DB2 Client Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

3.6.4 DB2 Tablespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

3.6.5 Optimization of Database Size on Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 5: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3.6.6 Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Production

Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

3.7 SAP Transport Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3.8 Internet Pricing and Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Chapter 4 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.1 Preparation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.2 Disabling the Windows Server 2008 (R2) Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.3 Performing Basic Windows Preparation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

4.4 Required User Authorization for Running SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.5 Preparing the SAP System Transport Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.6 Installing the Front-End Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4.7 Generating the SAP Solution Manager Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.8 Downloading JCE Policy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.9 Installing the Java Runtime Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.10 Preparing the Installation Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Chapter 5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

5.1 Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

5.2 Running SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.3.1 How to Avoid Automatic Logoff by SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.3.2 Interrupted Installation with SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

5.3.3 Performing a Remote Installation with SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

5.3.4 Starting SAPinst GUI Separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

5.3.5 Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

5.3.6 Entries in the Services File Created by SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 6 Post-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

6.1 Post-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

6.2 Logging On to the Application Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

6.3 Configuring User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

6.4 Installing the SAP License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

6.5 Applying the Latest Kernel and Support Package Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

6.6 Creating Symbolic Links on Windows Server 2008 (R2) for Application

Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

6.7 Configuring Remote Connection to SAP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

6.8 Installing the SAP Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 5/196

Page 6: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

6.9 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application

Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

6.10 Ensuring User Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

6.11 Enabling the Database for Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

6.12 Enabling Recoverability of the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

6.13 Performing a Full System Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

6.14 Configuring the Connection to a Central System Landscape

Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

6.15 Activating Internet Pricing and Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

6.16 Implementing SAP ERP ABAP Add-On Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

6.17 Performing the Client Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

6.18 Post-Installation Steps for the Diagnostics Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

6.19 Post-Installation Steps for the Host Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

6.20 Accessing Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution

Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Chapter 7 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

7.1 SAP Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

7.2 Performing a Domain Installation Without Being a Domain

Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

7.3 Installation of Multiple Components in One Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

7.4 MCOD Tablespaces and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.5 Integration of LDAP Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

7.6 Dialog Instance Installation for an Upgraded System only: Updating

Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

7.7 Installing the Host Agent Separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

7.8 Creating Tablespaces Manually (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

7.9 Adding Database Partitions to a Database Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

7.10 Installing a Near-Line Storage Database for an SAP NetWeaver BW

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

7.11 Starting and Stopping the SAP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

7.12 Configuring the Windows Server 2008 Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

7.13 Implementing Single Sign-On with Microsoft Kerberos SSP for Your SAP

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

7.14 Minimizing the Database Size after the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

7.15 Installing Windows Application Servers in a UNIX Environment . . . . . . . . . . 127

7.16 SAP System Security on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

7.17 Automatic Creation of Accounts and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 7: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

7.18 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

7.18.1 Troubleshooting with SAPinst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

7.19 Deleting an SAP System or Single Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually

(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

7.20.1 Deleting the Database (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

7.20.2 Deleting a DB2 Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

7.20.3 Deleting a Database Schema Manually (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

7.20.4 Deleting the DB2 Software Installation (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Chapter 8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

8.1 Installation Checklist for a High-Availability System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

8.2 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.2.1 System Configuration in MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.2.1.1 SAP System Components in an MSCS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.2.1.2 Multiple SAP Systems In One MSCS Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

8.2.1.3 Multiple SAP Systems In Multiple MSCS Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

8.2.1.4 Enqueue Replication Server in an MSCS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

8.2.2 Distribution of SAP System Components to Disks for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

8.2.3 Directories in an MSCS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

8.2.4 IP Addresses in an MSCS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

8.2.5 Obtaining and Determining IP Addresses for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

8.3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

8.3.1 Assigning Drive Letters for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

8.3.2 Mapping Host Names to IP Addresses for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

8.3.3 Checking the Mapping of Host Names for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

8.3.4 Windows Server 2003: Preparing an Existing SAP System to Support Multiple

Systems in one Microsoft Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

8.3.5 Windows Server 2003: Preparing the Installation of Multiple SAP Systems in

MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

8.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

8.4.1 Configuring the First MSCS Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

8.4.2 Installing the Database Instance on an MSCS Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

8.4.3 Preparing the Additional Node for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

8.4.4 Configuring the Database for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

8.4.5 Configuring the Additional MSCS Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

8.4.6 Installing the Central Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

8.4.7 Installing the Dialog Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 7/196

Page 8: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

8.5 Post-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

8.5.1 Post-Installation Checks for Enqueue Replication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

8.5.1.1 Checking the Status of the Enqueue Replication Server with

ENSMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

8.5.1.2 Monitoring the Lock Table During Failover with ENQT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

8.6 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

8.6.1 Moving MSCS Groups or Services and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

8.6.2 Rebooting During the Installation or Conversion for MSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

8.6.3 Starting and Stopping the SAP System in an MSCS Configuration . . . . . . . . . 183

Chapter A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

A.1 Online Information from SAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

A.2 Online Information from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

8/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 9: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

1 Introduction

This document explains how to install SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5 - technical

usage “Central Applications” ABAP. You perform the installation using SAPinst.

SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5 - technical usage “Central Applications” is based

on the technology of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including enhancement package 2. For more information

about the technology provided by SAP ERP and SAP NetWeaver, see http://service.sap.com/erp

and http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/netweaver.

Make sure you read the corresponding Master Guides before you start with this installation guide.

The Master Guides are available as follows:

http://service.sap.com/erp-inst SAP ERP 6.0 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 6.0 SAP

enhancement package <version> for SAP ERP 6.0

You can install SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5 - technical usage “Central

Applications” with the following software units:

■ SAP ERP Central Component (ECC)

NOTE

You also install SAP NetWeaver Application Server ABAP (AS ABAP) with SAP ERP Central

Component.

For more information about the usage types of SAP NetWeaver and their interdependencies, see the

document Master Guide – SAP NetWeaver 7.0 at http://service.sap.com/instguidesNW70.

Constraints

You need to consider the following constraints before you start your installation:

■ Your operating system platform must be 64-bit.

NOTE

The only instance, you can still install on 32-bit is the dialog instance.

■ Windows Server 2008 for Itanium-based systems editions is not supported.

■ As of Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0, the installation package contains only the

DB2 V9.7 installation DVDs. If you want to install your SAP system with DB2 V9.1 or DB2 V9.5,

you can do one of the following:

● Download the DB2 software from SAP Service Marketplace at:

http://service.sap.com/swcenter-3pmain

1 Introduction

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 9/196

Page 10: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

● Request the physical shipment of the DB2 V9.1 or DB2 V9.5 media using a customer message

on component XX-SER-SWFL-SHIP.

■ The SAP system installation on Windows Server 2003 (Itanium platform) is only possible with DB2

V9.1. As of DB2 V9.5, the installation of an SAP system on the Windows platform IA64 is no longer

supported.

Naming Conventions

■ SAP system refers to SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5 - technical usage "Central Applications”.

■ ABAP system refers to SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5 - technical usage "Central Applications”

ABAP

■ diagnostics refers to diagnostics in SAP Solution Manager.

■ diagnostics agent refers to the agent of diagnostics in SAP Solution Manager.

IBM Product Terminology

■ DB2 V9.7 refers to IBM DB2 Version 9.7 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

■ DB2 V9.5 refers to IBM DB2 Version 9.5 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

■ DB2 V9.1 refers to IBM DB2 Version 9.1 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

NOTE

If content in this document relates to all versions, no version number is mentioned.

Windows Operating System

In this document, “Windows Server 2008 (R2)” – with (R2) written in parentheses – means that the

information applies to both Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2.

Profiling for High Availability

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

The profile bars with the wording Only valid for: HA (MSCS) – for example, as in this section – refer to

content that is only valid if you are installing a high-availability (HA) system with Windows Server

Failover Clustering. The Windows cluster feature was previously called Microsoft Cluster Service

(MSCS). For practical reasons we are continuing to use the abbreviation MSCS in this guide.End of: HA (MSCS) |

1.1 New Features

The table below provides an overview of the new features related to the installation.

Make sure that you also read the release notes at http://service.sap.com/releasenotes.

Area Description

SAPinst ■ Running SAPinst with accessibility mode: ● Keyboard access:

1 Introduction

1.1 New Features

10/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 11: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Area DescriptionThis feature is generally available for all operating systems.

● High-color contrast:This feature is derived from the Windows display properties. For more information, see Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode [page 82].

● Custom font setting:This feature is derived from the Windows display properties. For more information, see Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode [page 82].

High Availability ■ New installation options for a high-availability system in a Microsoft ClusterSAP adapted the installation procedure for a high-availability system on Windows to make it easier and less error-prone for customers: ● First Cluster Node

This installation option now includes the previously separate options Central Services Instance for ABAP (ASCS), Central Services Instance (SCS), Enqueue Replication Server (ERS), and First MSCS Node.It performs the following steps: ◆ Installs the central services instance for ABAP

(ASCS) and prepares this host as the SAP global host ◆ Installs the enqueue replication server instance

(ERS) for the ASCS instance ◆ Installs the host agent ◆ Creates the SAP cluster group on the first cluster

node and adds the ASCS instance to the SAP cluster group

◆ For local instances, such as ERS, host agent, diagnostic agent, primary application server, or additional application server instance, you can only select local drives, whereas for the ASCS instance you can only select shared drives.The quorum disk is not available in the list of shared drives.

● Additional Cluster NodeThis installation option includes the previous options Enqueue Replication Server, and Additional MSCS Node.It performs the followings steps: ◆ Configures the additional cluster node to run the

SAP cluster group ◆ Installs the enqueue replication server instance

(ERS) for the ASCS instance on a local drive ◆ Installs the host agent on a local drive

■ As of Windows Server 2008 (R2), the Windows cluster feature is called Failover Clustering. For practical reasons we are continuing to use the general abbreviation MSCS in this guide.

1 Introduction

1.1 New Features

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 11/196

Page 12: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Area Description

Additional ABAP Technical Usage The installation of SAP ERP 6.0 including enhancement package 5 already contains the technical usage “Central applications”. If you want to install an additional ABAP technical usage, you have to use transaction SAINT.

Database-Specific Features

Area Description

Supported database versions The installation of SAP systems based on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including EHP2 is supported for the following DB2 database versions: ■ DB2 V9.7 ■ DB2 V9.5 ■ DB2 V9.1As of DB2 V9.1, you can have multiple DB2 installations on one physical machine. The database installations are independent of each other and can have different Fix Pack levels as well as different configuration settings, and so on.By default, the software is installed in the following directory:<drive>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\db2_software

Installation of near-line storage database

As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 incl. EHP2, you can install a near-line storage database using SAPinst. The near-line storage database is a remote DB2 database that you can use to store BW data that is not frequently used.

NOTE

You can only install the near-line storage database on DB2 V9.7 for Linux, UNIX,and Windows or higher.

For more information, see Installing a Near-Line Storage Database for an SAP NetWeaver BW System [page 122].

Inline LOBs and long VARCHAR replacement

As of DB2 V9.7, tables of the newly created database automatically use inline LOBs.That is, small LOBs up to a specified size are now stored together with the table data. LOBs that are larger than the specified size are transparently stored in the LOB storage object. Inlined LOBs are also subject to row compression.With inline LOBs, performance improves and disk space can be saved. For that reason, the type mapping for several ABAP dictionary types of the AS ABAP was adapted to use LOBs instead of LONG VARCHARs.For more information, see SAP Note 1351160.

Index compression As of DB2 V9.7, if you select Use DB2's Row Compression during the dialog phase of SAPinst, newly created tables are also enabled for index compression.For more information, see SAP Note 1351160 and Optimization of Database Size on Disk [page 51].

DB2 software installation SAPinst automatically installs and uninstalls the database software.

1 Introduction

1.1 New Features

12/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 13: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

1.2 SAP Notes for the Installation

You must read the following SAP Notes before you start the installation. These SAP Notes contain

the most recent information on the installation, as well as corrections to the installation

documentation.

Make sure that you have the up-to-date version of each SAP Note, which you can find at http://

service.sap.com/notes.

SAP Notes for the Installation

SAP Note Number Title Description

998833 Release Restrictions SAP ERP 6.0 - Enhancement Packages

At the time of the release of SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5, limitations affect the productive usage of certain functions. This note provides customer information on these restrictions.

1323537 Release Info SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0

SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 release information.

1313850 Release Restrictions for SAP EHP 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Customer information on restrictions in the production use of certain functions.

1387319 SAP NetWeaver 7.02/Business Suite 7i2010: Windows

Windows-specific information about the SAP system installation and corrections to this documentation.

1352690 DB6: SAP NetWeaver 7.0 incl. EHP 2/Business Suite 7i2010 – Windows

Database-specific information about the SAP system installation (ABAP and Java) and corrections to this documentation.

702175 DB6: Supporting several database partitions with DB2

Platform-specific additional information about the support of multiple partitions with DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

1134975 DB6: MSCS Installation on IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

Platform-specific additional information about the installation of Microsoft Cluster on IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

855498 Installation Prerequisite Checker SAP Software on UNIX, Windows, and IBM i: Checking OS Dependencies

73606 Supported Languages and Code Pages

Information on possible languages and language combinations in SAP systems

1067221 Central Note for Heterogeneous Installation

This SAP Note and its related SAP Notes describe the released operating system and database combinations for heterogeneous SAP systems landscapes.

789220 Support Package level for NetWeaver Installations/Upgrades

Information about the ABAP Support Package levels and kernel patch levels contained in the current SAP NetWeaver release.

774615 Support Package levels of ERP/ECC installations/upgrades

Information about the ABAP Support Package levels and kernel patch levels contained in the current SAP ERP release.

1 Introduction

1.2 SAP Notes for the Installation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 13/196

Page 14: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

SAP Note Number Title Description

1258912 PLM Core 7.00 Release Notes and Information

Information and references to other notes about installing PLM Core 7.00 and importing PLM Core 7.00 Support Packages.

1.3 How to Use This Guide

1. You decide on the installation option that you want to install.

The following installation options are described in this installation guide:

■ Central system

■ Distributed system

■ Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

High-availability systemEnd of: HA (MSCS) |

■ Dialog instances

■ Host Agent as a separate installation

For more information, see Installation Options Covered by This Guide [page 15].

2. You follow the list of steps at the beginning of each installation phase:

■ Planning [page 21]

■ Preparation [page 57]

■ Installation [page 71]

■ Post-Installation [page 85]

■ High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service (if relevant) [page 141]

NOTE

This applies to all installation options except the Host Agent as a Separate Installation [page 19].

This installation option has its own section in Additional Information [page 103].

In Additional Information [page 103] you can find special installation options and more information

about how to perform certain steps described in the main part of the guide.

1 Introduction

1.3 How to Use This Guide

14/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 15: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide

This section shows the installation options covered by this guide. You have to decide what exactly you

want to install because the steps you have to perform vary according to the installation option you

choose.

■ Central system [page 15]

■ Distributed system [page 16]

■ Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

High-availability system [page 17]End of: HA (MSCS) |

■ You can install dialog instances [page 17] to an existing system.

■ You can install a host agent [page 19] separately.

2.1 Central System

You can install a central system on a single host.

These are the following instances:

■ Database instance (DB instance)

■ Central instance

Optionally you can install one or more dialog instances. For more information, see Dialog Instance [page

17].

The following figure shows an example of SAP instances in a central system.

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide

2.1 Central System

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 15/196

Page 16: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 1: Central ABAP System

Optionally you can install one or more dialog instances. For more information, see Dialog Instance [page

17].

2.2 Distributed System

In a distributed system, every instance can run on a separate host.

These are the following instances:

■ Database instance (DB instance)

■ Central instance

NOTE

You must use the SAP global host as your central instance host.

Optionally you can install one or more dialog instances. For more information, see Installation of a Dialog

Instance [page 17].

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide

2.2 Distributed System

16/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 17: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 2: Distributed ABAP System

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

2.3 High Availability System

For more information about the system components you have to install and how to distribute them

on the specific hosts, see System Configuration in MSCS [page 145].End of: HA (MSCS) |

2.4 Dialog Instance

You can install one or more dialog instances for an existing SAP system. Dialog instances are optional

and can be installed on separate hosts. You can have one or more dialog instances.

A dialog instance can run on:

■ The host of any instance of the existing SAP system

■ On a dedicated host

NOTE

If you install a dialog instance in an existing non-Unicode system (that has been upgraded to the

current release), the dialog instance is automatically installed as a non-Unicode instance. SAPinst

determines if a non-Unicode system exists and chooses the correct executables for the system

type.

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide

2.3 High Availability System

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 17/196

Page 18: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

We do not recommend installing dialog instances on the SAP global host.

NOTE

If you want to install a dialog instance on an existing SAP system, you must perform a domain

installation. You must also make sure that your existing SAP system was installed as a domain

installation. For more information, see Domain or Local Installation [page 44].

Dialog Instance for a Central System

The following figure shows dialog instances that are running on dedicated hosts.

Figure 3: Dialog Instance for a Central System

For more information, see Central System [page 15].

Dialog Instance for a Distributed System

The following figure shows dialog instances that are running on dedicated hosts.

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide

2.4 Dialog Instance

18/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 19: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 4: Dialog Instance for a Distributed System

For more information, see Distributed System [page 16].

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

Dialog Instance for a High-Availability System

In a high-availability system, you require at least one dialog instance apart from the central instance.

For more information about how to install and distribute the application servers in an MSCS

configuration, see System Configuration in MSCS [page 145].End of: HA (MSCS) |

2.5 Host Agent as a Separate Installation

Using the host agent you can centrally monitor any host with the Alert Monitor or the SAP NetWeaver

Administrator or the Adaptive Computing Controller (ACC). In addition, the host agent is used by

the ACC for starting, stopping, and relocating SAP instances and databases.

The host agent is automatically installed during the installation of all new SAP system instances based

on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2 or higher. You only need to install a host

agent separately in the following cases:

■ You want to manage a host that does not have an SAP instance or component.

■ You have upgraded your SAP system to SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2 or

higher.

The section Installing the Host Agent Separately [page 117] describes how to perform the installation.

2 Installation Options Covered by this Guide

2.5 Host Agent as a Separate Installation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 19/196

Page 20: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides.

Page 21: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3 Planning

3.1 Planning Checklist

This section includes the planning steps that you have to perform for the following installation options:

■ Central, distributed, or high-availability system

■ Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps is available in the relevant chapter.

Prerequisites

1. You have planned your SAP system landscape according to the Master Guide at http://

service.sap.com/erp-inst and the Technical Infrastructure Guide at https://

cw.sdn.sap.com/cw/community/docupedia/tig.

2. You have decided on your installation option [page 15].

Central, Distributed, or High-Availability System

NOTE

In a central system, all mandatory instances are installed on one host. Therefore, if you are

installing a central system, you can ignore references to other hosts.

1. You check the hardware and software requirements [page 22] on each host.

2. You plan how to set up user and access management [page 35].

3. You identify basic SAP system installation parameters [page 36].

4. You decide whether you want to perform a domain or local installation [page 44].

5. You carefully plan the setup of your database [page 45].

6. You decide on the transport host to use [page 54].

7. You decide if you want to use Internet Pricing and Configurator [page 55].

8. Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

To install a high-availability system with Microsoft Cluster Service (MSCS), you perform the

MSCS-specific planning steps [page 143].End of: HA (MSCS) |

9. You can continue with Preparation [page 57].

Dialog Instance

1. You check the hardware and software requirements [page 22] for the installation host on which you want

to install one or more dialog instances.

2. You identify basic SAP system installation parameters [page 36].

3 Planning

3.1 Planning Checklist

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 21/196

Page 22: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. You can now continue with Preparation [page 57].

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

You check that your hosts meet the hardware and software requirements for your operating system

and the SAP instances.

CAUTION

If your hosts do not fully meet the requirements, you might experience problems when working

with the SAP system.

Prerequisites

■ Make sure that the host name meets the requirements listed in SAP Note 611361.

Process Flow

1. Check the Product Availability Matrix at http://service.sap.com/pam for supported operating

system releases.

2. Check the hardware and software requirements using:

■ The Prerequisite Checker in one of two modes:

● Standalone mode (optional) before the installation process

For more information, see Running the Prerequisite Checker Standalone [page 23].

● Integrated in SAPinst (mandatory) during the installation process

For more information, see Running SAPinst [page 72].

NOTE

For the most recent updates to the Prerequisite Checker, always check SAP Note 855498.

■ The hardware and software requirements checklists for:

● Central system [page 24]

● Distributed system [page 26]

● Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

High availability system with MSCS [page 29]End of: HA (MSCS) |

● Dialog instance [page 33]

● Host agent as a separate installation [page 33]

3. If you want to install a production system, the values provided by the Prerequisite Checker and

the hardware and software requirements checklists are not sufficient. In addition, do the following:

■ You use the Quick Sizer tool available at http://service.sap.com/sizing.

For more information about the Quick Sizer and available sizing guides, see the Master Guide

– SAP NetWeaver 7.0 at http://service.sap.com/installnw70 Planning .

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

22/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 23: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ You contact your hardware vendor, who can analyze the load and calculate suitable hardware

sizing depending on:

● The set of applications to be deployed

● How intensively the applications are to be used

● The number of users

3.2.1 Running the Prerequisite Checker in Standalone Mode (Optional)

Before installing your SAP system, you can run the Prerequisite Checker in standalone mode to check the

hardware and software requirements for your operating system (OS) and the SAP instances.

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you use both the Prerequisite Checker and the requirements tables for reference.

NOTE

When installing your SAP system, SAPinst automatically starts the Prerequisite Checker and checks

the hardware and software requirements in the background.

Prerequisites

■ You have prepared the installation master DVD on the required installation host [page 65].

Procedure

1. You start SAPinst [page 72].

2. On the Welcome screen, choose <Your SAP product> Software Life-Cycle Options Additional Preparations

Prerequisites Check .

3. Follow the instructions in the SAPinst dialogs and enter the required parameters.

NOTE

For more information about each parameter, position the cursor on the parameter field and

choose F1 in SAPinst.

When you have finished, the Parameter Summary screen appears summarizing all parameters you have

entered and want to have checked. If you want to make a change, select the relevant parameters

and choose Revise.

4. To start the prerequisites check, choose Next.

Result

The Prerequisite Checker Results screen displays the results found. If required, you can also check the results

in file prerequisite_checker_results.html, which you can find in the installation directory.

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 23/196

Page 24: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3.2.2 Requirements for a Central System

If you want to install a central system, where all instances reside on one host, this host must meet the

following requirements:

NOTE

■ The listed values are sufficient for development systems or quality assurance systems but

not for production systems.

■ For up-to-date information on the released and supported operating system and database

versions for your SAP product and database, see the Product Availability Matrix (PAM) at

http://service.sap.com/pam .

Hardware Requirements for a Central System

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check

Minimum disk space ■ SAP system files (not including paging file):5 GB (x64)8 GB (IA64)

■ Database InstanceFor more information about the required disk space, see SAP Note 1352690.

NOTE

For safety reasons (system failure), the file systems must be distributed physically over several disks, or RAID-technology must be used.

■ 4.3 GB of temporary disk space for every required installation medium that you have to copy to a local hard disk

To check disk space:1. Windows Server 2003:

Choose Start All ProgramsAdministrative Tools Computer

Management Disk Management .2. Windows Server 2008 (R2):

Choose Start All ProgramsAdministrative Tools StorageComputer Management Disk

Management .3. Right-click the drive and choose

Properties.

Minimum RAM 4 GB To check RAM:Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

Paging file size For more information, see SAP Note 1518419.

To check paging file size:1. Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

24/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 25: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check2. Windows Server 2003:

Choose Advanced.3. Windows Server 2008 (R2):

Choose Advanced system settings.4. In section Performance, select

Settings... Advanced .5. If required, in section Virtual

memory, choose Change.

NOTE

Do not select Automatically managed paging file size for all drives.

Suitable backup system - –

Software Requirements for a Central System

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

Windows operating system

■ English 64-bit version of one of the following Windows Server Editions: ● Windows Server 2003

◆ Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition ◆ Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition ◆ Windows Server 2003 Datacenter

Edition

CAUTION

The SAP system installation on Windows Server 2003 (Itanium platform) is only possible with DB2 V9.1.

● Windows Server 2008 (R2)

CAUTION

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) for Itanium-based systems editions is not supported.

◆ Windows Server 2008 R2 is only supported with DB2 V9.5 and DB2 V9.7.

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Standard Edition

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Enterprise Edition

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Datacenter Edition

NOTE

For up-to-date information on the released and supported operating system versions for your SAP product and database, see the

To check your Windows version:1. Choose Start All Programs

Accessories Command Prompt

2. Enter the command winver

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 25/196

Page 26: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

Product Availability Matrix (PAM) at http://service.sap.com/pam.

CAUTION

Do not use any other locales than en_US.

■ For any version of Windows Server, you need the latest supported service pack

■ Windows Server 2003: A suitable Windows Resource Kit is strongly recommended.

■ Windows Server 2003: Updated CPU driversFor more information, see SAP Note 1036194.

Database software

■ DB2 V9.7 ■ DB2 V9.5 ■ DB2 V9.1(automatically installed by SAPinst).

CAUTION

■ For the installation of your SAP system, only the English version of DB2 is supported.

■ You must only use the DB2 software provided by the SAP installation DVDs.

For more information, see SAP Note 101809.

3.2.3 Requirements for a Distributed System

This section provides information about the hardware and software requirements in a distributed

system, where the SAP instances can reside on different hosts.

The tables show the requirements for the:

■ Database instance

■ Central instance

■ Dialog instance (optional)

NOTE

■ The listed values are sufficient for development systems or quality assurance systems but

not for production systems.

■ If you install several SAP instances on one host, you need to add up the requirements.

■ For up-to-date information on the released and supported operating system versions for your

SAP product and database, see the Product Availability Matrix (PAM) at http://

service.sap.com/pam.

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

26/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 27: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Hardware Requirements for a Distributed System

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check

Minimum disk space ■ Database instanceFor more information about the required disk space, see SAP Note 1352690.

NOTE

For safety reasons (system failure), the file systems must be distributed physically over several disks, or RAID-technology must be used.

■ Central instance (not including paging file):5 GB (x64)8 GB (IA64) ● In addition you require 4 GB (x64),

or 8 GB (IA64) per additional platform.

● In addition you require 1.5 GB for the diagnostics agent

■ Dialog instance (optional) (not including paging file):2.5 GB (x64)5 GB (IA64)

■ Temporary disk space for every required installation medium that you have to copy to a local hard disk:4.3 GB

To check disk space:1. Windows Server 2003:

Choose Start All ProgramsAdministrative Tools Computer

Management Disk Management .2. Windows Server 2008 (R2):

Choose Start All ProgramsAdministrative Tools StorageComputer Management Disk

Management .3. Right-click the drive and choose

Properties.

Minimum RAM 4 GB To check RAM:Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

Paging file size For more information, see SAP Note 1518419.

To check paging file size:1. Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

2. Windows Server 2003:Choose Advanced.

3. Windows Server 2008 (R2):Choose Advanced system settings.

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 27/196

Page 28: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check4. In section Performance, select

Settings... Advanced .5. If required, in section Virtual

memory, choose Change.

NOTE

Do not select Automatically managed paging file size for all drives.

Suitable backup system –

Software Requirements for a Distributed System

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

Windows operating system

■ English 64-bit version of one of the following Windows Server Editions: ● Windows Server 2003

◆ Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition ◆ Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition ◆ Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition

● Windows Server 2008 (R2)

CAUTION

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) for Itanium-based systems editions is not supported.

◆ Windows Server 2008 R2 is only supported with DB2 V9.5 and DB2 V9.7.

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Standard Edition

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Enterprise Edition

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Datacenter Edition

CAUTION

Do not use any other locales than en_US. ■ For any version of Windows Server, you need the

latest supported service pack ■ Windows Server 2003: A suitable Windows

Resource Kit is strongly recommended. ■ Windows Server 2003: Updated CPU drivers

For more information, see SAP Note 1036194.

To check your Windows version:1. Choose Start All Programs

Accessories Command Prompt

2. Enter the command winver

Database software

■ Database instance: ● DB2 V9.7 ● DB2 V9.5 ● DB2 V9.1(automatically installed by SAPinst).

■ Central instance / dialog instance:

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

28/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 29: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

● DB2 V9.7 CLI Driver / DB2 V9.7 JDBC Driver ● DB2 V9.5 CLI Driver / DB2 V9.5 JDBC Driver ● DB2 V9.1 CLI Driver / DB2 V9.1 JDBC Driver(automatically installed by SAPinst)For more information, see SAP Note 101809.

CAUTION

■ For the installation of your SAP system, only the English version of DB2 is supported.

■ You must only use the DB2 software provided by the SAP installation DVDs.

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

3.2.4 Requirements for a High-Availability System

General Requirements

■ Windows Server 2003 only:

You must check that your cluster hardware is certified.

AddOn Technology Center for SAP (Add On TCS) certifies hardware platforms for SAP on

Microsoft Windows. The cluster must be included in the Microsoft list of certified clusters and its

components. You can access the lists as follows:

● http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/hcl/default.mspx

● http://www.saponwin.com

■ Windows Server 2008 (R2) only:

1. Check that your cluster hardware is certified for Windows Server 2008 (R2) and has the

Windows Server 2008 (R2) logo.

2. You must validate your failover cluster configuration by running the Validate a Configuration

Wizard, which is included in the Failover Cluster Management snap-in. The Failover Cluster Validation

Report must not show any warnings and errors.

■ The MSCS nodes of the cluster must be connected by a private and public network:

● The public network enables communication from the MSCS nodes of the cluster to other

resources in the local area network (LAN).

● The private network enables internal communication between the MSCS nodes. In particular,

it enables the Cluster Service running on all MSCS nodes to regularly exchange messages on

the state of the MSCS nodes so that the failure of resources is quickly detected.

■ Each of the MSCS nodes in the cluster must have its own local disks and have access to shared disks

that can be reached by the MSCS nodes via a shared bus.

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 29/196

Page 30: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

All software – except the Windows operating system, the DB2 executables, and the MSCS software

– is stored on the shared disks.

One of the shared disks must be used exclusively by the quorum (if a single quorum device cluster

is used) that stores the cluster registry and records information about the state of the cluster.

You require at least six shared disks.

For more information about the distribution of components to local and shared disk, see Distribution

of SAP System Components to Disks for MSCS [page 152].

■ All disk controllers must be able to support hardware-based RAID.

CAUTION

You cannot use a host with a domain controller as an MSCS cluster node.

Hardware and Software Requirements

The following tables show the hardware and software requirements for the:

■ Central services instance for ABAP (ASCS)

■ Database instance

■ Enqueue Replication Server instance (ERS)

■ Central instance

■ Dialog instance

■ Diagnostics agent

NOTE

■ The listed values are sufficient for development systems or quality assurance systems but

not for production systems.

■ If you install several SAP instances on one host, you need to add up the requirements.

■ If you install multiple SAP systems in one MS cluster, make sure that together with your

hardware partner you have set up the correct sizing for your system configuration.

■ For up-to-date information on the released and supported operating system versions for your

SAP product and database, see the Product Availability Matrix (PAM) at http://

service.sap.com/pam.

Hardware Requirements for a High-Availability System

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check

Minimum disk space

■ Central services instance for ABAP (ASCS)(not including paging file):5 GB (x64)8 GB (IA64) ● In addition you require 4 GB (x64), or 8 GB (IA64)

per additional platform. ■ Database instance

For more information about the required disk space, see SAP Note 1352690..

To check disk space:1. Windows Server 2003:

Choose Start All ProgramsAdministrative Tools Computer

Management Disk Management .

2. Windows Server 2008 (R2):Choose Start All Programs

Administrative Tools Storage

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

30/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 31: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check

NOTE

All software – except the Windows operating system, the DB2 executables, and the MSCS software – is stored on the shared disksYou require at least six shared disks.

■ Enqueue replication server instance (ERS) (not including paging file):5 GB (x64)8 GB (IA64)

■ Central instance (not including paging file):2.5 GB (x64)5 GB (IA64) ● In addition you require 4 GB (x64), or 8 GB (IA64)

per additional platform. ● In addition you require 1.5 GB for the diagnostics

agent ■ Dialog instance (not including paging file):

2.5 GB (x64)5 GB (IA64)

■ Temporary disk space for every required installation medium that you have to copy to a local hard disk:4.3 GB

Computer Management Disk Management .

3. Right-click the disk and choose Properties.

Minimum RAM

4 GB To check RAM:Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

Paging file size

For more information, see SAP Note 1518419 To check paging file size:1. Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

2. Windows Server 2003:Choose Advanced.

3. Windows Server 2008 (R2):Choose Advanced system settings.

4. In section Performance, select Settings... Advanced .

5. If required, in section Virtual memory, choose Change.

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 31/196

Page 32: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check

NOTE

■ Do not select Automatically managed paging file size for all drives.

■ You must adjust the size of the paging file on all MSCS nodes.

Suitable backup system

Software Requirements for a High Availability System

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

Windows operating system

■ English 64-bit version of one of the following Windows Server Editions: ● Windows Server 2003

◆ Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition

◆ Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition

● Windows Server 2008 (R2)

CAUTION

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) for Itanium-based systems editions is not supported.

◆ Windows Server 2008 R2 is only supported with DB2 V9.5 and DB2 V9.7.

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Enterprise Edition

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Datacenter Edition

CAUTION

Do not use any other locales than en_US.

■ For any version of Windows Server, you need the latest supported service pack

■ Windows Server 2003: A suitable Windows Resource Kit is strongly recommended

■ Windows Server 2003: Updated CPU driversFor more information, see SAP Note 1036194.

To check your Windows version:1. Choose Start All Programs

Accessories Command Prompt2. Enter the command winver

NOTE

■ Windows Server 2003:You must set up the MSCS Cluster Service as described in the Microsoft documentation. During this setup you are asked for a Windows Domain Account to run the Cluster Service. We strongly recommend creating an account different from the <sapsid>adm user, for example ClusterServiceuser=sapprdc

ladm, where Clustername=sapprdcl.

■ Windows Server 2008 (R2):You must add the operating system feature Failover Clustering on all MSCS nodes.

Database software

■ Database instance: ● DB2 V9.7 ● DB2 V9.5 ● DB2 V9.1

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

32/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 33: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

(automatically installed by SAPinst). ■ Central instance / dialog instance:

● DB2 V9.7 CLI Driver / DB2 V9.7 JDBC Driver

● DB2 V9.5 CLI Driver / DB2 V9.5 JDBC Driver

● DB2 V9.1 CLI Driver / DB2 V9.1 JDBC Driver

(automatically installed by SAPinst)

CAUTION

■ For the installation of your SAP system, only the English version of DB2 is supported.

■ You must only use the DB2 software provided by the SAP installation DVDs.

For more information, see SAP Note 101809.

End of: HA (MSCS) |

3.2.5 Requirements for the Dialog Instance

For more information about the hardware and software requirements for the dialog instance, see one

of the following sections:

■ Requirements for a Distributed System [page 26]

■ Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

Requirements for a High-Availability System [page 29]End of: HA (MSCS) |

3.2.6 Requirements for the Host Agent as a Separate Installation

If you want to install the host agent separately, the installation host has to meet the following hardware

and software requirements:

CAUTION

For up-to-date information on the released and supported operating system versions for your

SAP product and database, see the Product Availability Matrix (PAM) at http://

service.sap.com/pam.

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 33/196

Page 34: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Hardware Requirements for the Host Agent

Hardware Requirement Requirement How to Check

Minimum disk space: ■ Host agent:80 MB

■ Temporary disk space for every required installation medium that you have to copy to a local hard disk:4.3 GB

To check disk space:1. Windows Server 2003:

Choose Start All ProgramsAdministrative Tools Computer

Management Disk Management .2. Windows Server 2008 (R2):

Choose Start All ProgramsAdministrative Tools StorageComputer Management Disk

Management .3. Right-click the disk and choose

Properties.

Minimum RAM: 40 MB To check RAM:Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

Paging file size: For more information, see SAP Note 1518419.

To check paging file size:1. Choose Start Control Panel

System .

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 R2:If System is not visible, change View by: from Category into Large icons.

2. Windows Server 2003:Choose Advanced.

3. Windows Server 2008 (R2):Choose Advanced system settings.

4. In section Performance, select Settings... Advanced .

5. If required, in section Virtual memory, choose Change.

NOTE

Do not select Automatically managed paging file size for all drives.

Suitable backup system –

Software Requirements for the Host Agent

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

Windows operating system:

■ English 64-bit version of one of the following Windows Server Editions:

To check your Windows version:

3 Planning

3.2 Hardware and Software Requirements

34/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 35: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Software Requirement Requirement How to Check

● Windows Server 2003 ◆ Windows Server 2003

Enterprise Edition ◆ Windows Server 2003

Datacenter Edition ● Windows Server 2008 (R2)

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Enterprise Edition

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) Datacenter Edition

CAUTION

◆ Windows Server 2008 (R2) for Itanium-based systems editions is not supported.

◆ Windows Server 2008 R2 is only supported with DB2 V9.5 and DB2 9.7.

CAUTION

Do not use any other locales than en_US.

■ Windows Server 2003: For any version of Windows Server, you need the latest supported service pack.

■ Windows Server 2003: A suitable Windows Resource Kit is strongly recommended.

1. Choose Start All ProgramsAccessories Command Prompt .

2. Enter the command winver.

Database software: – –

3.3 Planning User and Access Management

You have to plan how you want to configure user and access management for your SAP system to be

installed.

Before you add a newly installed SAP system to your system landscape, you must decide which kind

of user management you want to use:

■ Use Central User Administration (CUA).

■ Use an LDAP directory as the data source for user data.

Procedure

Using Central User Management

1. You install your SAP system as described in this installation guide.

3 Planning

3.3 Planning User and Access Management

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 35/196

Page 36: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

2. Add the system to Central User Administration (CUA). For more information, see Configuring User

Management [page 87].

Using an LDAP directory as Source for User Data

1. You install your SAP system as described in this installation guide.

2. Configure the user management of the newly installed SAP system to use and LDAP directory.

For more information, see Configuring User Management [page 87].

More InformationFor more information about configuring the user management of your SAP system to be installed, see

the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management Identity Management for

System Landscapes Integration of User Management in Your System Landscape

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

SAPinst prompts for input parameters during the Define Parameters phase of the installation.

You can install your SAP system either in Typical or Custom mode:

■ Typical

If you choose Typical, you perform the installation with default settings. This means that you only

have to respond to a small selection of prompts including at least the following, which are described

in the corresponding tables below:

● SAP system ID and database ID

● SAP system profile directory – only for systems with instances on separate hosts

● Master password

● Java Runtime Environment (JRE) – only prompted if not already available on the installation

host

● Java Cryptographic Extension (JCE) Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy files archive – only

prompted if not already available on the installation host

● System Landscape Directory (SLD) destination

● SAP Solution Manager Key

If you want to change any of the default settings, you can do so on the Parameter Summary screen.

■ Custom

If you choose Custom, you are prompted for all parameters. At the end, you can still change any of

these parameters on the Parameter Summary screen.

NOTE

You cannot change from Custom to Typical mode or from Typical to Custom mode on the Parameter

Summary screen.

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

36/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 37: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The following tables list the basic system parameters that you need to specify before installing your

SAP system:

■ SAP System Parameters

■ SAP System Database Parameters

■ Diagnostics Agent Parameters

For all other installation parameters, use the F1 help in the SAPinst screens.

SAP System Parameters

Parameters Description

SAP System ID <SAPSID>

The SAP System ID <SAPSID> identifies the whole SAP system.

CAUTION

Choose your SAP system ID carefully. You cannot change the SAP system ID after the installation.

Make sure that your SAP system ID: ■ Is unique throughout your organization. Do not use an existing <SAPSID> when

installing a new SAP system. ■ Consists of exactly three alphanumeric characters ■ Contains only uppercase letters ■ Has a letter for the first character ■ Does not include any of the following, which are reserved IDs:

ADD ALL AMD AND ANY ARE ASC AUX AVG BIT CDC COM CON DBA END EPS FOR GET GID

IBM INT KEY LOG LPT MAP MAX MIN MON NIX NOT NUL OFF OLD OMS OUT PAD PRN RAW

REF ROW SAP SET SGA SHG SID SQL SUM SYS TMP TOP UID USE USR VAR

■ If you want to install a dialog instance, make sure that no gateway instance with the same SAP system ID (SAPSID) exists in your SAP system landscape.

SAP System Instance Numbers

Technical identifier for internal processes. It consists of a two-digit number from 00 to 97.The instance number must be unique on a host. That is, if more than one SAP instance is running on the same host, these instances must be assigned different numbers.If you do not enter a specific value, the instance number is set automatically to the next free and valid instance number that has not yet been assigned to the SAP system to be installed or to SAP systems that already exist on the installation host.To find out the instance numbers of SAP systems that already exist on the installation host, look for subdirectories ending with <nn> of local \usr\sap\<SAPSID> directories.The value <nn> is the number assigned to the instance.For more information, see SAP Directories [page 104].

CAUTION

Do not use 43, and 89 for the instance number because: ■ 43 is part of the port number for MSCS ■ 89 is part of the port number for Windows Terminal Server

Master Password Common password for all users created during the installation: ■ Operating system users (for example <sapsid>adm, SAPService<SAPSID>)

CAUTION

If you did not create the operating system users manually before the installation, SAPinst creates them with the common master password. In this case, make sure

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 37/196

Page 38: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameters Descriptionthat the master password meets the requirements of your operating system and of your database.

■ ABAP users SAP* and DDIC

CAUTION

SAPinst applies the master password to users SAP*and DDIC for SAP system clients 000 and 001 only, but not to users SAP*, DDIC, and EARLYWATCH in SAP system client 066.Instead, SAPinst always assigns the following passwords to these users in client 066:SAP*: 06071992EARLYWATCH: supportSee also Ensuring User Security [page 94].

■ Database users ■ Secure Store key phrase

For more information, see table line Key Phrase for Secure Store Settings.

NOTE

If a user already exists, you are prompted to confirm the password for this user.

Password policyThe master password: ■ Must be 8 to 14 characters long ■ Must contain at least one letter in uppercase (A-Z) ■ Must contain at least one letter in lowercase (a-z) ■ Must contain at least one digit (0-9) ■ Must not contain \ (backslash) and " (double quote)Depending on the installation option, additional restrictions might apply (for example, the master password must not contain the name of a Java user created during the installation).

Message Server Port

CAUTION

The message server port number must be unique for the SAP system on all hosts. If there are several message port numbers on one host, all must be unique.

Port number of the SAP Message Server: If you do not specify a value, the default port number is used.ABAP Message Server PortThere is an external message server port and an internal message server port.The ABAP message server uses both the internal and the external message server ports. The default profile contains the configuration for both message server ports.The external message server port uses the parameter rdisp/msserv with default value 36<nn>, where <nn> is the instance number of the ABAP message server instance.The internal message server port uses the parameter rdisp/msserv_internal with default value 39<nn>, where <nn> is the instance number of the ABAP message server instance.For more information about the parameters used for message server ports, see SAP Note 821875.

Java Runtime Environment (JRE)

A valid JRE is required for the installation with SAPinst. For more information about JRE versions supported by SAP and about how to install them, see Installing the Java Runtime Environment [page 64].

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

38/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 39: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameters Description

DNS Domain Name for SAP System

If you want to use HTTP-based URL frameworks such as Web Dynpro applications, you have to specify the DNS domain name for the SAP system.The DNS Domain Name is used to calculate the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), which is configured in profile parameter SAPLOCALHOSTFULL. FQDN is the fully qualified domain name for an IP address. It consists of the host name and the domain name:<host name>.<domain name>

The DNS Domain Name is needed to define the URLs for the ABAP and Java application servers. It is appended to the server name to calculate the FQDN.For more information, see Configuring Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDN) in Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application Server [page 89].

EXAMPLE

If your application server host is called kirk.wdf.sap.com, the DNS Domain Name is wdf.sap.com.

Path to SAPCRYPTO.SAR

The SAP Cryptographic Library is required to enable Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption of HTTP connections. If you do not have SAPCRYPTO.SAR available, you can download it from:http://service.sap.com/swdc Installations and Upgrades Search for the term “SAP Cryptogaphic

Software”After the installation has finished, you have to perform some post-installation steps to configure AS ABAP for supporting SSL. For more information, see Configuring AS ABAP to Support Secure Socket Layer (SSL) in Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application Server [page 89].This software product is subject to export control regulations in Germany as the country of origin and import regulations of your own country. SAP may not yet have a corresponding export license for your user or company. Contact the contract department in your local SAP company. To download the SAP Cryptographic Software from the SAP Service Marketplace, you need a customer user ID. Before any transfer of these software products to persons, companies or other organizations outside your company, in particular in the case of any re-export of the software products, authorization is required from the German export control authorities. This might also be required from your responsible national export control authorities. This also applies to transfers to affiliated companies. Corresponding laws and regulations in the recipient country may also exist which restrict the import or the use of these software products.

Password of Operating System Users

The passwords of the operating system users must comply with the Windows password policy. SAPinst processes the passwords of operating system users as follows: ■ If the operating system users do not exist, SAPinst creates the following users:

● <sapsid>adm

This user is the SAP system administrator user and is a member of the local Administrators group.

● SAPService<SAPSID>

This user is the Windows account to run the SAP system and is not a member of the local Administrators group.

● sapadm

The host agent user sapadm is used for central monitoring services. SAPinst creates this user by default as a local user without being a member of the local Administrators group.If required, you can change this user to become a domain user on the parameter summary screen. For more information, see Performing a Domain Installation Without

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 39/196

Page 40: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameters DescriptionBeing a Domain Administrator [page 107]. For security reasons, however, SAP strongly recommends to create this user as a local user.

● <dasid>adm

This user is dedicated to the diagnostics agent installation with sufficient authorization to manage the agent. It is created on the central instance host and on every dialog instance host.SAPinst creates this user by default as a local user. If required, you can change this user to become a domain user on the parameter summary screen. For security reasons, however, SAP strongly recommends to create this user as a local user.

SAPinst sets the master password for these users by default. You can overwrite and change the passwords either by using the parameter mode Custom or by changing them on the parameter summary screen.

■ If the operating system users already exist, SAPinst prompts you for the existing password, except if the password of these users is the same as the master password.

NOTE

This does not apply if the <dasid>adm user already exists. SAPinst prompts you for the password even if the password of this user is the same as the master password.

CAUTION

Make sure that you have the required user authorization [page 61] for these accounts before you start the installation with SAPinst.

SAP Solution Manager key

To install your SAP system, you need to generate an SAP Solution Manager key [page 64], which the installation requires to continue. For more information, see SAP Note 805390.You have already generated an SAP Solution Manager Key for the central instance, so you do not have to do this for the dialog instance.

SAP System Database Parameters

Parameters Description

Database ID <DBSID> The <DBSID> identifies the database instance. SAPinst prompts you for the <DBSID> when you are installing the database instance.The <DBSID> can be the same as the <SAPSID>.

CAUTION

Choose your database ID carefully. Renaming is difficult and requires that you reinstall the SAP system.

■ If you want to install a new database, make sure that your database ID: ● Is unique throughout your organization ● Consists of exactly three alphanumeric characters ● Contains only uppercase letters ● Has a letter for the first character ● Does not include any of the following, which are

reserved IDs:ADD ALL AMD AND ANY ARE ASC AUX AVG BIT CDC COM

CON DBA END EPS FOR GET GID IBM INT KEY LOG LPT

MAP MAX MIN MON NIX NOT NUL OFF OLD OMS OUT PAD

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

40/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 41: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameters DescriptionPRN RAW REF ROW SAP SET SGA SHG SID SQL SUM SYS

TMP TOP UID USE USR7 VAR

Base directories of DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

■ Drive for the database directory ■ Database instance home ■ Database log files ■ Database diagnostic data ■ Drives for SAPDATA directoriesFor more information, see Base Directories for the Database Instance [page 46].

DB2 instance owner db2<dbsid> db2<dbsid> has the DB2 system administration authorities and belongs to group db<dbsid>adm, which has DB2 SYSADM authorities. By default, user db2<dbsid> is a member of group db<dbsid>adm.

ABAP database connect user (sap<sapsid>) The user name corresponds to the database schema where ABAP tables are created.

Database Communication Port The DB2 Communication Port is used for TCP/IP communication between the database server and remote DB2 clients.In a central system installation and for the database instance in a distributed installation, SAPinst always proposes 5912 as default value.

NOTE

SAPinst requests this value during the database instance installation.

First port The database partition servers communicate using registered services. During the installation a port range is assigned for this communication.SAPinst proposes default values. You must make sure that these values correspond to the values of your database partition servers. If necessary, adapt them according to your settings.

CAUTION

The value for First Port must be the same for all database partition servers.The range between First Port and Last Port must correspond to the maximum number of partitions on a database partition server.

Last port The database partition servers communicate using registered services. During the installation a port range is assigned for this communication.SAPinst proposes default values. You must make sure that these values correspond to the values of your database partition servers. If necessary, adapt them according to your settings.

CAUTION

The range between First Port and Last Port must correspond to the maximum number of partitions on a database partition server.

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 41/196

Page 42: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameters DescriptionOnly valid for: HA (MSCS) |

Drive for database software locationEnd of: HA (MSCS) |

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

In an MSCS installation, the database directories have to reside on a shared drive whereas the database software must reside on a local drive.End of: HA (MSCS) |

Drive database directory In a non-MSCS installation, enter the drive where the database directory and the database software is located.

Drive for diagnostic data Location of the db2diag.log that contains diagnostic data required in case of, for example, a database crash.

Drive for online database Log Files These log files are needed for database backups and recovery.Specify the drive where the database online log files are to be stored.

Drive sapdata Enter the drive where each sapdata directory is to be located.

Add sapdata directories Tablespaces are stored in <drive>:\db2\<SAPSID>\sapdata<n>.By default, SAPinst creates four sapdata directories (sapdata1, sapdata2, sapdata3, sapdata4).

NOTE

Be aware that the first part, for example <drive>:\db2\<SAPSID>\ is definite and you can only enter a value for sapdata<n>.

Use Change, that is, add or remove the names and number of the sapdata directories.

Database memory or instance memory Specify the size of the memory that DB2 requires for the database instance: ■ For DB2 V9.5, you set the database manager configuration

parameter INSTANCE_MEMORY. Parameter INSTANCE_MEMORY includes the database- and application-specific memory segments that are used by DB2.

■ For DB2 V9.1, you have to specify the database memory by setting database manager configuration parameter DATABASE_MEMORY.

CAUTION

The database requires more memory than only the database-specific memory segments (which are specified by parameter DATABASE_MEMORY).

Minimize database size You can significantly reduce the size of your database by selecting the following options in SAPInst during the dialog phase: ■ Use DB2's Row Compression

■ Use Deferred Table Creation

CAUTION

Before you select these options, make sure that you have read the information in Optimization of Database Size on Disk [page 51] and SAP Note 1151343.

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

42/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 43: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameters Description

DB2 Software Path Specify the file system path where either an existing DB2 software installation already resides or where you want the new copy of DB2 to be installed.

RECOMMENDATION

If you want to install a new copy of DB2, we recommend that you accept the default path suggested by SAPinst.

Diagnostics Agent Parameters

The diagnostics agent is installed automatically with the SAP system.

Parameters Description

System ID of the Diagnostics Agent <DASID>

SAPinst sets the system ID of the diagnostics agent, <DASID>, to DAA by default.If DAA is already used, SAPinst assigns another default system ID. You can overwrite the default system ID as required.

CAUTION

Choose the <DASID> carefully. Renaming is difficult and requires you to reinstall the diagnostics agent.

Make sure that the <DASID>: ■ Either does not yet exist on the local installation host or does already

exist but was only used for a diagnostics agent installation ■ Consists of exactly three alphanumeric characters ■ Contains only uppercase letters ■ Has a letter for the first character ■ Does not include any of the following, which are reserved IDs:

ADD ALL AMD AND ANY ARE ASC AUX AVG BIT CDC COM CON DBA END

EPS FOR GET GID IBM INT KEY LOG LPT MAP MAX MIN MON NIX NOT

NUL OFF OLD OMS OUT PAD PRN RAW REF ROW SAP SET SGA SHG SID

SQL SUM SYS TMP TOP UID USE USR VAR

Instance Number of the Diagnostics Agent

Technical identifier for internal processes for the diagnostics agent, consisting of a two-digit number from 00 to 97. Default is 97.If 97 is already used for an instance number, the diagnostics agent instance number is set automatically to the next free and valid instance number.The instance number is used to specify the name of the diagnostics agent instance directory that SAPinst automatically creates during the installation.The directory of the diagnostics agent instance is called SMDA<Instance_Number>.For more information, see SAP Directories [page 104].The same restrictions apply as in “Instance Number of the SAP System” (see above).

Java(TM) Cryptography Extension (JCE) Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files Archive

You have to download the JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files 6 archive for the SAP JVM that is installed with the diagnostics agent.For more information, see Downloading the JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files Archive [page 64].

3 Planning

3.4 Basic SAP System Installation Parameters

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 43/196

Page 44: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameters Description

SLD Destination You can choose between the following options: ■ Register in existing central SLD

Choose this option to register the diagnostics agent you are installing in an existing SAP System Landscape Directory (SLD) by specifying the SLD connection parameters listed below.

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you select this option. ■ No SLD destination

If you select this option, SAPinst does not prompt you for further SLD parameters.Choose this option if you do not want to register the diagnostics agent of the SAP system you are installing in an existing SAP System Landscape Directory (SLD).You then have to configure the SLD destination for the diagnostics agent manually after the installation with SAPinst has finished.

SLD HTTP Host (FQN) The fully qualified host name of the SAP system with the System Landscape Directory (SLD)

SLD HTTP Port The HTTP port of the SAP system with the System Landscape Directory (SLD). The following naming convention applies:5<instance_number>00.

EXAMPLE

If the instance number of your Java system is 01, the SLD HTTP Port is 50100.

SLD Data Supplier User and password The existing SLD Data Supplier user and password of the existing central SLD

3.5 Domain or Local Installation

Before you install the SAP system, you have to decide whether you want to perform a domain or

local installation, since this affects how the user account information is stored and accessed.

For more information about the differences between a local and domain installation, go to Start

Help and Support and search for What is the difference between a domain and a workgroup?.

Domain Installation

In a domain installation, the user account information is stored centrally in one database on the domain

controller and is accessible to all hosts in the system.

You have to perform a domain installation if one of the following applies:

■ You install a distributed system.

■ Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

You install a high-availability system with MSCS.End of: HA (MSCS) |

■ You want to use Single Sign-On.

3 Planning

3.5 Domain or Local Installation

44/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 45: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ You use a common transport host for several SAP systems running on different computers.

Local Installation

In a local installation, all Windows account information is stored locally on one host and is not visible

to any other hosts in the system.

If the SAP system is to run on a single machine (central system), you can perform a local installation.

NOTE

If your SAP system was installed as a local installation and you want to later change to a domain

installation, you must perform a homogeneous system copy. For more information, see the

documentation System Copy for SAP Systems based on SAP NetWeaver <release> <technology> at:

http://service.sap.com/instguides <your product>

More Information

■ Required User Authorization for Running SAPinst [page 61]

■ Implementing Single Sign-On with Microsoft Kerberos SSP [page 125]

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

NOTE

The following sections apply especially to the installation of a production system.

When you plan your SAP system installation, it is essential to consider the setup of your database layout

with regard to the distribution of, for example, SAP directories or database file systems, to disks. The

distribution depends on your specific environment and you must take factors into consideration, such

as storage consumption of the software components involved, safety requirements and expected

workload. Make sure that you read the following sections before starting the SAP system installation:

1. Base Directories for the Database Instance [page 46]

2. Users and Groups [page 47]

3. Directory Structure of the New Client Connectivity [page 48]

4. DB2 Tablespaces [page 50]

5. Optimization of Database Size on Disk [page 51]

6. Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Production Systems [page 53]

NOTE

For more information about DB2 (for example, printable manuals or online information), see

Online Information from IBM [page 187].

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 45/196

Page 46: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3.6.1 Base Directories for the Database Instance

This section describes the base directories that SAPinst creates automatically during the installation of

the database instance.

Additionally, in a standard installation SAPinst creates all required SAP directories and automatically

sets the correct access rights.

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you install the complete SAP system on redundant storage, such as RAID-5

or intelligent storage devices. To improve system performance, you should use multiple I/O

controllers.

Directory Name Description

<drive>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\db2_software Directory for the DB2 database software created during installation of DB2 server software. SAPinst uses this directory for the integrated database software installation.

NOTE

As of DB2 V9.1 and higher, you can have multiple DB2 copies on one machine.

<drive>:\DB2<DBSID> DB2 database directory

NOTE

If you are not using an MSCS cluster, you can choose only one drive for both the database directory and for the DB2 database software.

<drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\log_dir Contains the online log files

<drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\db2dump Contains DB2 diagnostic log files, DB2 dump files, and further service engineer information

■ With DB2's automatic storage management:<drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\sapdata<n>

■ No automatic storage management:<drive>:\db2\<SAPSID>\sapdata<n>

SAP data directories for an SAP system.By default, SAPinst creates four sapdata directories (sapdata1, sapdata2, sapdata3, sapdata4).

NOTE

■ In a production system, you must make sure that the sapdata directories are located in different file systems. Otherwise, system performance can decrease. For more information, see Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Database Directories [page 53].

■ If you require more or fewer sapdata directories, you can change this on the SAPinst Sapdata Directories dialog.

■ If you add additional sapdata directories during the dialog phase of SAPinst, the corresponding tablespace containers are equally distributed.

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

46/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 47: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Each of the above directories can be placed on a different local drive during the installation.

Access Authorization

The following table shows the access rights that to be set for the DB2 directories. To guarantee full data

security, you may manually set the access privileges of the subdirectories. The owner of all these

directories must be the user Administrator.

Directory Access Privilege Full Control for User/Group

<drive>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\db2_software

(Default)Administrator, SYSTEM, SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin

<drive>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\db2_software

\DB2<DBSID> (Default)SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin, db2<dbsid>, SYSTEM

<drive>:\DB2<DBSID> SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin, db2<dbsid>, SYSTEM

<drive>:\db2 Everyone

<drive>:\db2\<DBSID> SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin, db2<dbsid>, SYSTEM

■ With DB2's automatic storage management:<drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\sapdata<n>

■ No automatic storage management:<drive>:\db2\<SAPSID2>\sapdata<n>

db2<dbsid>, SYSTEM

<drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\log_dir db2<dbsid>, SYSTEM

3.6.2 Users and Groups

Using DB2 the following users and groups are needed in the SAP system.

DB2 Users

Users Description

<sapsid>adm SAP system administrator

SAPService<SAPSID> SAP service account

db2<dbsid> Database administrator

NOTE

Independently of the installation type (domain or local), this user is only used on the database host.

sap<sapsid> Default ABAP connect user for SAP database objects. You can change this user during the installation.

NOTE

In a local installation, this user is only created on the database host.

CAUTION

If you are performing a domain installation, the database connect users are created by default

in the domain of <sapsid>adm. However, if required, you can create them locally.

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 47/196

Page 48: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Groups

Groups Description Members

SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin Domain-level SAP administration group

<sapsid>adm; SAPService<SAPSID>

SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin Local SAP administration group <sapsid>adm; SAPService<SAPSID>

db<dbsid>adm Database administration group db2<dbsid>

db<dbsid>ctl Database control group <sapsid>adm

db<dbsid>mnt Database maintenance group -

db<dbsid>mon Database monitoring group

NOTE

This group is created according to the same rules as the database connect user(s).

sap<sapsid>

DB2ADMNS_<DBSID> Database extended security group for administrators

db2<dbsid>

SAPService<SAPSID>

DB2USERS_<DBSID> Database extended security group for users

3.6.3 Directory Structure of the New DB2 Client Connectivity

With DB2 V9.1, a new DB2 client connectivity was introduced with a new directory structure as shown

in the following graphic:

Figure 5: Directory Structure of the Database Client

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

48/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 49: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

DB2 Thin Client

During the installation of the database instance, the DB2 CLI driver is installed in the global directory

of your SAP system (global\db6\<OS>\db6_clidriver\). The DB2 CLI driver is installed for the same

operating system as the database instance.

NOTE

If you are installing an application server (central or dialog instance) on the same operating

system as the database server, the already existing DB2 CLI driver in directory global\db6

\<OS>\db6_clidriver is used.

If you install an application server (central or dialog instance) on an operating system that is

new to your SAP system landscape, an additional DB2 CLI driver for this new operating

system is also installed in the global directory, for example, global\db6

\<OS_application_server>\db6_clidriver.

Each time you start the application server, the DB2 CLI driver is copied from the global\db6 directory

to the local exe directory, and the active SAP system uses the DB2 CLI driver in the local exe directory.

Thus, by exchanging the driver software in the global\db6 directory, you are able to update the DB2

CLI driver while the SAP system is up and running. Each time you restart the application server, the

DB2 CLI driver is again copied to the local exe directory, and always the latest version is used.

CAUTION

However, be aware that if you start SAP standalone tools (for example, tp or R3trans) from the

command line, these tools use the DB2 CLI driver in the global\db6 directory and not the one

in the local exe directory.

If you have updated the DB2 CLI driver in the global directory but not yet restarted the application

server, the versions of the DB2 CLI driver in the global\db6 and in the local exe directory can

differ.

The configuration and connectivity information of the DB2 CLI driver is stored in file db2lci.ini in

the global directory of your SAP system and it is shared among all additional application servers. File

db2lci.ini is created during the installation of the database server.

Updating the Global Directory During Fix Pack Installation

For information about how to update the DB2 CLI driver or the JDBC driver during the Fix Pack

installation, see the respective SAP Note for your database version:

Database Version SAP Note

DB2 V9.7 1363170

DB2 V9.5 1138550

DB2 V9.1 978555

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 49/196

Page 50: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Result

The db6_update_db.bat updates the DB2 CLI driver in the global\db6 directory for all operating

systems available as well as the JDBC driver.

3.6.4 DB2 Tablespaces

During the dialog phase of the installation, SAPinst offers to create the following tablespace types:

■ Data and index tablespaces managed by DB2's automatic storage management (AutoStorage)

During the installation, SAPinst assigns the sapdata directories to the database, which

automatically distributes all tablespaces over the sapdata directories or file systems. In addition,

the database automatically adjusts the tablespace sizes as long as there is enough free space left in

the sapdata directories or file systems.

If one of the sapdata directories becomes full, new stripe sets are automatically created in the

remaining sapdata directories.

Since the DB2 database automatically creates and administers the tablespace containers, the overall

administration effort for the database decreases considerably using tablespaces managed by

automatic storage management.

■ DMS File tablespaces in autoresize mode

SAPinst creates all DMS tablespaces with FILE containers in autoresize mode as well as one tablespace

container for each tablespace in every sapdata directory or file system. DB2 automatically extends

the size of all DMS FILE tablespaces in autoresize mode as long as there is space left in the sapdata

directories or file systems.

With DMS FILE tablespaces in autoresize mode, you are more flexible to distribute heavily used

tablespaces to dedicated storage devices at a later point in time.

For more information, see Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Production Systems [page 53].

■ Other tablespace types

If you want to use other tablespace types, for example SMS or DMS DEVICE (raw devices), you have

to create them manually. Therefore, you deselect the option Create tablespaces with SAPinst during

the dialog phase of SAPinst and proceed as described in Creating Tablespaces Manually [page 119].

At a later point in time, you can switch between DMS FILE and DMS DEVICE tablespaces using DB2s

redirected restore tool. In addition, you can enable and disable autoresize mode for databases that are

not set up in AutoStorage mode.

To move tablespaces from AutoStorage to other storage modes or the other way round, you have to

perform a homogenous system copy. For more information, see the appropriate system copy guide

that is available on SAP Service Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/instguidesNW <Your SAP

NetWeaver Release> Installation Installation — SAP NetWeaver Systems .

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

50/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 51: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Container Type FILE

If you are using tablespaces managed by DB2's automatic storage management, DB2 creates and

administers the tablespace containers for you.

If you are using DMS FILE tablespaces in autoresize mode, each tablespace of your SAP installation

has at least one container. A container is a file that holds pages belonging to a tablespace. Since you

might want to add containers as your database grows in size, you should adhere to the following naming

scheme:

The first container of a tablespace is given the name of the tablespaces plus the ending container001.

Therefore, <SAPSID>#BTABD has at least the container <SAPSID>#BTABD.container001. The next

container is called <SAPSID>#BTABD.container002, and so on.

Container Sizes

Equal container sizes ensure the proper balancing of container access and therefore better performance,

if the containers reside on different disks. SAPinst creates all containers of a tablespace with the same

size.

Tablespace Sizes Without Autoresize

By default, the tablespaces are created with autoresize mode. If you are using tablespaces without the

autoresize mode, you must extend the tablespaces manually. If you do not increase your tablespace

sizes in time, the following error occurs:

Error occurred during DB access SQLException SQLCODE: -289

More Information

■ Creating Tablespaces Manually [page 119]

■ Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Production Systems [page 53]

3.6.5 Optimization of Database Size on Disk

With the increasing cost for managed storage, database sizes become more and more a concern. You

can significantly reduce the size of your database by selecting the following options during the dialog

phase of SAPInst:

■ Use DB2's Row Compression

■ Use Deferred Table Creation

NOTE

If you choose to install your SAP system without selecting these options, you can still activate

both functions after the installation.

For more information, see Minimizing the Database Size after the Installation [page 126].

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 51/196

Page 52: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Using DB2s Row Compression

DB2's row compression (also known as deep compression) transparently compresses table data in your

database, using a dictionary-based compression algorithm. Using row compression typically reduces

the size of tables by 60 to 80%. As a result, the size of the database decreases by approximately 30 to 55%.

NOTE

If you want to use row compression, make sure that you have a valid license for this function. If

you purchased your DB2 license from SAP (an SAP OEM license), DB2 row compression is already

part of your license agreement.

For more information about row compression, see the Database Administration Guide: SAP on IBM DB2 for

Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

Using DB2's Index Compression

As of DB2 V9.7, indexes can now also be compressed. To minimize the size of the index on disk, the

DB2 database manager can use various index compression techniques, for example, RID list

compression or prefix compression.

NOTE

Index compression is not supported on catalog indexes and MDC block indexes.

If you select Use DB2's Row Compression during the dialog of SAPinst, newly created tables are also

automatically enabled for index compression. For more information about index compression, see SAP

Note 1351160.

Using Deferred Table Creation

CAUTION

■ Before you use this function, make sure that you read SAP Note 1151343.

The SAP function deferred table creation delays the creation of empty database tables until the first row is

inserted. That is, until the first row is inserted, the table is substituted by a virtual table (which effectively

is a special database view). As soon as the first row is inserted, the SAP kernel transparently replaces the

virtual table with a database table. Depending on the number of tables that remain empty over your

system lifetime, the use of deferred table creation can reduce the size of your database by several GB.

More Information

■ Minimizing the Database Size after the Installation (Optional) [page 126]

■ Database Administration Guide: SAP on IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows at:

http://servic.sap.com/instguidesnw70 Operations Database-Specific Guides

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

52/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 53: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3.6.6 Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Production Systems

During the installation of a production SAP system, you should control the distribution of database

directories or file systems to physical disks. On Windows operating systems, you assign drive letters to

the system components when running the installation tool. On UNIX operating systems, this is done

when you create file systems before you start the installation tool. The way you distribute your database

components to disk can significantly affect system throughput and data security, and must therefore

be carefully planned.

NOTE

When you work out the assignment of components to disks, you first need to obtain an overview

of the main components and their corresponding directories. Make sure that you have an overview

of the expected database size, the available disks and the I/O adapters that are used to attach the

disks to your system.

Data Safety and Performance Considerations

When you plan your SAP system installation, you must consider the following:

■ In an emergency situation you must be able to perform a rollforward recovery of your database in

a production system.

In a production system, the DB2 database must run in log retention mode. Otherwise, log files

cannot be applied to the database rollforward operations. You can set the database to log

retention mode by changing database configuration parameters at the very end of the installation

process. After changing the parameters, you are automatically forced to perform an offline backup.

Otherwise, you cannot reconnect to the database, which is reported with an error message.

For information, see Enabling Recoverability of the Database [page 97].

■ Keep the tablespace container files in directories sapdata* and the online log directory log_dir

on separate disks to be able to perform a full rollforward recovery if a database container file is

damaged or lost.

■ Since transaction data is lost if online log files are damaged, we recommend that the online log

directory log_dir is stored on redundant storage.

You can perform hardware mirroring using RAID adapters or intelligent storage systems. For

performance reasons, hardware solutions for mirroring should be preferred over mirroring

solutions like logical volume managers that are offered by operating systems.

In addition, the DB2 product offers dual log file mechanism. For more information, see SAP

Note 409127.

■ A high transaction volume can cause high I/O on the online log files. Therefore, the distribution

of the online log files is a crucial factor of performance considerations. Ideally, the online log files

should be located on fast physical volumes that do not have high I/O load coming from other

components. This allows efficient logging activity with a minimum of overhead such as waiting

3 Planning

3.6 Setup of Database Layout

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 53/196

Page 54: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

for I/O. You should avoid storing the online log files on the same physical volume as the operating

system paging space, or a physical volume with high I/O activity.

■ By default, the SAP installation tool creates tablespaces that are managed by DB2s automatic storage

management (AutoStorage tablespaces). Tablespaces in AutoStorage mode offer maximum ease of use

and low administrative cost. In addition, modern file systems avoid most concurrency problems.

If you are not using AutoStorage tablespaces, you have detailed but manual control over the

distribution of data on disk.

If this is the case and if you want to enhance performance of large databases, we recommend that

you:

● Distribute heavily used tablespaces across separate disks.

● Avoid putting multiple containers of one tablespace onto the same device.

● Move heavily used tables into their own tablespaces that reside on dedicated disks.

● Put containers of index tablespaces and their respective data tablespaces on different disks.

● Do not configure operating system I/O (for example, swap, paging or heavily spool) on DB2

data disks.

■ You can run DB2 databases with multiple page sizes in a single database. But once specified for a

tablespace, the page size cannot be changed. For each page size a separate buffer pool has to be

created in your database. During a standard installation, SAPinst creates the database with a uniform

page size of 16 KB. As a result only buffer pools with 16 KB have to be created and administered.

More Information

See the Administration Guide: Performance that you can access using the link in section Online Information from

IBM [page 187].

3.7 SAP Transport Host

The SAP transport host contains the transport directory used by the SAP transport system to store

transport data and change SAP system information, such as software programs, data dictionary data,

or customization data. If you have several SAP systems, they are usually organized in transport domains.

In most cases, all SAP systems in a transport domain have a common transport directory.

When you install an SAP system, you have to decide which transport host and directory you want to

use for your SAP system:

■ Use the transport directory that SAPinst creates during the installation of the SAP system by default

on the global host in <Drive>:\usr\sap\trans.

■ Use a transport directory located on a host other than the global host (default host):

● You can use an existing transport directory and host in your SAP system landscape.

● You can set up a new transport directory on a different host.

In either case, you must prepare this host for use by the new SAP system [page 62].

3 Planning

3.7 SAP Transport Host

54/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 55: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

More Information

■ SAP Directories [page 104]

■ See the SAP Library:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability

Software Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System Change and Transport System

– Overview (BC-CTS) Basics of the Change and Transport System Transport Management System – Concept

3.8 Internet Pricing and Configurator

We deliver Internet Pricing and Configurator (IPC) as part of SAP AP (Application Platform). It runs

on normal application servers.

IPC is required for SAP CRM Mobile Application Components that are part of software unit SAP CRM

Java Components (JCRM). For more information, see the Master Guide [page 185].

Prerequisites

The IPC (SAP AP IPC JAVA 7.00) requires the Virtual Machine Container (VMC) as runtime

environment. The VMC is part of SAP Basis 7.02.

Integration

No separate IPC installation steps are necessary. No separate host or separate Java runtime environment

is necessary. IPC functionality is processed on each application server. The IPC does not support any

special methods to support high availability or load balancing. By running on each application server,

SAP standard load balancing or high-availability mechanisms apply.

You need to enable the VMC after the installation of your SAP system. For more information, see

Activating Internet Pricing and Configurator [page 99].

3 Planning

3.8 Internet Pricing and Configurator

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 55/196

Page 56: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides.

Page 57: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

4 Preparation

4.1 Preparation Checklist

This section includes the preparation steps that you have to perform for the following installation

options:

■ Central, distributed, or high-availability system

■ Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps is available in the relevant chapter.

Central, Distributed, or High-Availability System

NOTE

In a central system, all mandatory instances are installed on one host. Therefore, if you are

installing a central system, you can ignore references to other hosts.

1. If you use Windows Server 2008 (R2), you disable the Windows Server 2008 (R2) firewall [page 58] on

each host.

2. You perform basic preparations on Windows [page 58].

3. You check that you have the required user authorization for running SAPinst [page 61].

4. If required, you prepare the SAP system transport host [page 62] for your SAP system.

5. You install the SAP frontend software [page 63] on the desktop of the end user.

6. You generate the SAP Solution Manager key [page 64] for your SAP system.

7. You download JCE policy files [page 64].

8. You install the Java Runtime Environment [page 64].

9. You make sure that the required installation media [page 65] are available on each host.

10. Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

To install a high-availability system with Microsoft Cluster Service (MSCS), you also perform the

MSCS-specific preparation tasks [page 143].End of: HA (MSCS) |

11. You can continue with Installation [page 71].

Dialog Instance

You have to perform the following preparations on the host where you install the dialog instance:

1. If you use Windows Server 2008 (R2), you disable the Windows Server 2008 (R2) firewall [page 58] on

each host.

2. You perform basic preparations on Windows [page 58].

3. You check that you have the required user authorization for running SAPinst [page 61].

4 Preparation

4.1 Preparation Checklist

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 57/196

Page 58: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

4. If required, you prepare the SAP system transport host [page 62] for your SAP system.

5. You make sure that the required installation media [page 65] are available on each host.

6. If you upgraded your SAP system from an earlier source release to a target release lower than SAP

ERP 6.0 SR3 then installed enhancement package 5 with the SAP Enhancement Package Installer

(SAPehpi), and now want to install a dialog instance, you have to update instance profiles of the existing

system [page 116].

7. You can continue with Installation [page 71].

4.2 Disabling the Windows Server 2008 (R2) Firewall

The Windows firewall – which is turned on by default as of Windows Server 2008 (R2) – is configured

to allow only a small set of Windows-specific inbound IP connections. By default, outbound connections

are not limited to rules and are therefore not restricted by the firewall.

The default firewall settings are valid for the out-of-the-box installation of Windows Server 2008 (R2).

These settings apply to local policies. For domain policies that override local policies, other rules might

apply.

To avoid any problems with non-configured TCP/IP ports that are used by the SAP system, you need

to disable the firewall on all Windows hosts before you install the SAP system with SAPinst. We

recommend that you secure network access to the SAP application servers with a real physical firewall

or use a router Access Control List (ACL).

ProcedureOnly valid for: HA (MSCS) |

NOTE

In a high-availability system, you have to disable the firewall on all MSCS nodes.

End of: HA (MSCS) |

1. Choose Start Administrative Tools Windows Firewall with Advanced Security .

2. Right-click Windows Firewall with Advanced Security and choose Properties.

3. Choose the relevant profile (in most cases Domain Profile) and set the Firewall state to Off.

4.3 Performing Basic Windows Preparation Steps

This section informs you about basic preparation steps that you have to perform before you install the

SAP system, including the following:

■ Checking the Windows file system

■ Checking the Windows domain structure (domain installation only)

■ Windows Server 2003: Reducing the size of the file cache

4 Preparation

4.2 Disabling the Windows Server 2008 (R2) Firewall

58/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 59: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ Windows Server 2008 R2: Ensuring performance

Procedure

Checking the Windows File System

You need to check that you are using the Windows file system NTFS on hosts where you want to install

the SAP system. NTFS supports full Windows security and long file names.

NOTE

Do not install the SAP system on a FAT partition.

Perform the check as follows:

1. Open the Windows Explorer.

2. Select the relevant disk.

3. Choose Properties General .

The system displays the type of file system in use.

4. Check that the file system is NTFS.

Checking the Windows Domain Structure

NOTE

You do not need this step for a local installation.

For a domain installation, we recommend that you check that all SAP system hosts are members of a

single Windows domain. We recommend this for all SAP system setups.

We assume that you are familiar with checking Windows domain structures. For more information,

see the Windows documentation.

In Windows, you can implement either of the following domain models for the SAP system:

■ Extra domain

In this model, the SAP system is embedded in its own domain, which is specially defined for SAP.

A second domain exists for the user accounts.

In Windows, the SAP domain and user domain must be incorporated in a domain tree. In this tree,

the user accounts must form the root domain and the SAP domain must be a child domain of this.

■ Single domain

In this model, the SAP system, and the user accounts are included in a single domain.

CAUTION

You cannot create local users and groups on the host that is used as domain controller. Therefore,

we do not support running an SAP instance (including the database instance) on the host where

the domain controller is installed.

Windows Server 2003: Reducing the Size of the File Cache

The Windows file cache directly competes with SAP programs for memory. Therefore, it is best to adjust

the file cache as described below.

4 Preparation

4.3 Performing Basic Windows Preparation Steps

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 59/196

Page 60: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

NOTE

In a high-availability environment, you must adjust the size of the file cache on all cluster nodes.

End of: HA (MSCS) |

1. Choose Start Control Panel Network Connections Local Area Connections .

2. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box, choose Properties.

3. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, double-click File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft

Networks.

4. Select Maximize data throughput for network applications.

CAUTION

If you cannot select File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks, this option has not yet been

installed. To install it, you need the Windows Server CDs.

5. To confirm your entries, choose OK.

Windows Server 2008 R2: Ensuring Performance

Windows Server 2008 R2 provides these power plans to maximize performance and conserve energy:

■ Balanced (recommended)

■ High Performance

■ Power Saver

By default, Windows Server 2008 R2 sets the Balanced (recommended) power plan, which saves energy by

turning off or putting system resources (hardware) to sleep. However, resource intensive applications

might experience performance problems if they cannot fully use the available hardware resources. To

avoid this, make sure that you set the power plan on your Windows Server 2008 R2 host to High

Performance.

To change a power plan, proceed as follows:

1. Choose Start Control Panel Power Options

2. Select Power Options.

3. In the Select a power plan window, select High Performance.

4. If you do not see Power Options, type the word power in the Search Control Panel box, and select Choose a

power plan.

NOTE

By default, the option to change power plans is disabled.

To enable it, select the link Change settings that are currently unavailable.

Choose the High Performance option, and close the Power Option window.

4 Preparation

4.3 Performing Basic Windows Preparation Steps

60/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 61: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

4.4 Required User Authorization for Running SAPinst

Although SAPinst automatically grants the required rights to the user account used for the installation,

you have to check whether this account has the required authorization to perform the installation.

The authorization required depends on whether you intend to perform a domain or local installation.

If necessary, you have to ask the system administrator to grant the account the necessary authorization

before you start the installation. If you attempt the installation with an account that has not the

required authorization, the installation aborts.

This section informs you about the authorization required for a domain and a local installation.

Procedure

CAUTION

Do not use the user <sapsid>adm for running SAPinst.

Domain Installation

For a domain installation the account used for the installation needs to be a member of the local

Administrators and the domain Admins group of the domain involved. All machines in the system

must belong to the same domain. In a domain installation, the user information is stored centrally on

the domain controller and is accessible to all hosts in the system.

If the SAP system is to be distributed across more than one machine, SAP strongly recommends you

to perform a domain installation to avoid authorization problems.

CAUTION

■ If you install a distributed system as a local installation, this can lead to authorization problems

for the operating system users <sapsid>adm and SAPService<SAPSID>. It can also lead to

problems with the transport directory, which is usually shared by several SAP systems.

Therefore, SAP does not support a local installation for a distributed system and recommends

you to install a distributed system as a domain installation.

If you still want to perform a local installation for a distributed system, make sure that:

If you still want to perform a local installation for a system with dialog instances that run on

hosts other than the host running the central instance, make sure that:

● You use the same password for the <sapsid>adm or the SAPService<SAPSID> user on all

hosts.

The password for the <sapsid>adm and SAPService<SAPSID> user can differ.

● You use the same master password on all hosts.

● All hosts belong to the same Windows work group.

■ Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

In an MSCS configuration, you always have to perform a domain installation.End of: HA (MSCS) |

4 Preparation

4.4 Required User Authorization for Running SAPinst

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 61/196

Page 62: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ For performance and security reasons, SAP does not support an SAP system installation on

a domain controller.

■ If for any reason, the account used for the installation is not a member of the domain

Admins group, you can perform the installation with a domain user who is a member of the

local Administrators group. However, the domain administrator has to prepare the system

appropriately for you.

For more information, see Performing a Domain Installation without being a Domain Administrator [page

107].

For a domain installation, you need to:

1. Check that the account used for the installation is a member of the domain Admins group.

2. If required, obtain these rights by asking the system administrator to enter the account as a member

of the domain Admins group.

Local Installation

For a local installation the account used for the installation needs to be a member of the local

Administrators group of the machine involved. In a local installation, all Windows account

information is stored locally on one host and is not visible to any other hosts in the system.

If the SAP system is to run on a single machine, you can perform a local installation.

CAUTION

Do not use the Windows built-in account Administrator or the renamed built-in account to

install your SAP system with SAPinst. The built-in account only has restricted network access

rights that are required by SAPinst. If you renamed the built-in account Administrator, do not

create a new account named Administrator.

For a local installation, you need to:

1. Check that the account used for the installation is a member of the local Administrators group.

2. If required, obtain these rights by asking the system administrator to enter the account as a member

of the local Administrators group.

4.5 Preparing the SAP System Transport Host

The transport host has a directory structure that is used by the SAP transport system to store transport

data and metadata.

When you install an SAP system, SAPinst by default creates the transport directory on the global host

in \usr\sap\trans.

If you do not intend to use the directory structure of the system you are going to install, but want to

use another new transport directory on another host, or an existing transport directory in your system

landscape, you need to prepare that transport host:

4 Preparation

4.5 Preparing the SAP System Transport Host

62/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 63: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ If the directory structure already exists, you must set up its security to allow the new system to

write to it.

■ If it does not yet exist, you must create the core directory structure and a share to export it for

other computers as well as set the security on it.

The global transport directory \usr\sap\trans is used by the Change and Transport System (CTS).

The CTS helps you to organize development projects in the ABAP Workbench and in Customizing,

and then transport the changes between the SAP systems in your system landscape. For more

information, see:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software

Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System

Procedure

1. If the transport directory does not yet exist, do the following:

1. Create the directory \usr\sap\trans on the host to be used as the transport host.

2. Share the usr\sap directory on the transport host as SAPMNT and set the permission for

Everyone to Full Control for this share.

This enables SAPinst to address the transport directory in the standard way as \\SAPTRANSHOST

\SAPMNT\trans.

2. Grant Everyone the permission Full Control for the transport directory.

CAUTION

Remove the Full Control to Everyone permission after you have finished the installation with

SAPinst and only grant Full Control on this directory to the SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin groups

of all the systems that are part of your transport infrastructure. SAPinst assigns the appropriate

rights with the help of an additional SAP_LocalAdmin group.

For more information, see Automatic Creation of Accounts and Groups [page 131].

4.6 Installing the Front-End Software

For the installation, make sure that the front-end software is installed on at least one computer in your

system environment.

We recommend that you install SAP front-end release 7.10 or higher.

For more information about installing the front-end software, see the documentation SAP Front End

Installation Guide - <Current Release> at:

http://service.sap.com/installNW70 Installation - Clients

4 Preparation

4.6 Installing the Front-End Software

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 63/196

Page 64: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

4.7 Generating the SAP Solution Manager Key

You must generate the Solution Manager key because the installation tool prompts for it during the

installation. Without this key, the installation process cannot continue. For more information about

SAP Solution Manager and its role within your system landscape, see the Master Guide of your SAP

application.

Procedure

1. If SAP Solution Manager is not yet available in your system landscape, proceed as follows:

1. Order SAP Solution Manager as described in SAP Note 628901.

2. Install SAP Solution Manager as described in the documentation Installation Guide – SAP Solution

Manager <Current Release> on <OS>: <Database>, which is available at:

http://service.sap.com/instguides SAP Components SAP Solution Manager <Current

Release>

2. Generate the SAP Solution Manager key as described in SAP Note 811923.

Result

The SAP Solution Manager system displays the key for which you are prompted during the installation

of your SAP system.

4.8 Downloading JCE Policy Files

Strong encryption is mandatory for the diagnostics agent. You need to download the latest version

of the Java(TM) Cryptography Extension (JCE) Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files 6 archive for the SAP JVM

so that SAPinst can install them.

Procedure

Download the latest version of the JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files 6 archive as described in

SAP Note 1240081.

NOTE

Do not unzip the archive.

More Information

For more information, see Basic SAP System Installation Parameters [page 36]

4.9 Installing the Java Runtime Environment

You need to prepare your system for SAPinst. This includes the installation of a Java Runtime

Environment (JRE), which is required for SAPinst. The JRE is part of the JDK (Java Development Kit)

and not part of the SAP shipment.

4 Preparation

4.7 Generating the SAP Solution Manager Key

64/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 65: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

If required, you can perform a remote installation using a standalone SAPinst GUI on a separate

Windows or UNIX host. This lets you perform the installation on a remote host, controlling it

with the SAPinst GUI from a local host. If you want to perform a remote installation, see Performing

a Remote Installation with SAPinst [page 79].

Procedure

1. Check the JRE versions that are released for SAP systems in the Product Availability Matrix (PAM):

1. Go to http://service.sap.com/pam.

2. Choose Start PAM with navigation by category.

3. On the right-hand panel, choose SAP Application Components <your product> .

4. Choose tabstrip JSE Platforms.

NOTE

For more information about how to download it, see the relevant SAP Note for your operating

system, which is referenced near the beginning of SAP Note 723909.

2. Make sure a valid JRE version is installed, as follows:

■ If the JRE is not already installed, download and install it.

■ If the JRE is already installed, check the installed version of the JRE by entering:

java -version

4.10 Preparing the Installation Media

This section describes how to prepare the installation media, which is available as follows:

■ You obtain the installation media as part of the installation package.

■ You can also download the installation media from SAP Service Marketplace, as described at the

end of this section.

Procedure

1. Identify the required media for your installation as listed below.

Keep them separate from the remaining media as this helps you to avoid mixing up media during

the installation.

CAUTION

The media names listed below are abbreviated.

You can find the full names in section Media List in the corresponding Master Guide for SAP

ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5 - Technical Usage “Central Applications”:

http://service.sap.com/erp-inst SAP ERP 6.0 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 6.0

SAP enhancement package <current version> for SAP ERP 6.0

4 Preparation

4.10 Preparing the Installation Media

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 65/196

Page 66: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The following table shows the required DVDs for the installation of an SAP system based on the

usage type AS ABAP:

NOTE

For a central system, where all mandatory instances reside on one host, you need the

installation DVDs that are required for the central instance and database instance.

SAP Instance Installation Required DVDs

Global host preparation ■ Installation Master DVD ■ Kernel DVD

Central instance, dialog instance ■ Installation Master DVD ■ Kernel DVD ■ RDBMS DVD

CLI Driver / JDBC Driver DVD for your database version

CAUTION

● As of Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0, the installation package contains only the DB2 V9.7 installation DVDs.If you want to install your SAP system with DB2 V9.1 or DB2 V9.5, you can do one of the following: ◆ Download the DB2 software from SAP

Service Marketplace at:http://service.sap.com/

swcenter-3pmain

◆ Request the physical shipment of the DB2 V9.1 or DB2 V9.5 media using a customer message on component XX-SER-SWFL-SHIP.

● You must only use the DB2 software provided by the SAP installation DVDs.

● The CLI / JDBC driver DVD is required only if the application server is running on a different operating system than the database instance.

● The SAP system installation on Windows 2003 (Itanium platform) is only possible with DB2 V9.1.As of DB2 V9.5, the installation of an SAP system on the Windows platform IA64 is no longer supported.

Database instance ■ Installation Master DVD ■ Kernel DVD ■ SAP ERP Installation Export DVD ■ RDBMS DVD

CLI Driver / JDBC Driver DVD for your database version

4 Preparation

4.10 Preparing the Installation Media

66/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 67: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

SAP Instance Installation Required DVDsCAUTION

● As of Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0, the installation package contains only the DB2 V9.7 installation DVDs.If you want to install your SAP system with DB2 V9.1 or DB2 V9.5, you can do one of the following: ◆ Download the DB2 software from SAP

Service Marketplace at:http://service.sap.com/

swcenter-3pmain

◆ Request the physical shipment of the DB2 V9.1 or DB2 V9.5 media using a customer message on component XX-SER-SWFL-SHIP.

● You must only use the DB2 software provided by the SAP installation DVDs.

● The CLI / JDBC driver DVD is required only if the application server is running on a different operating system than the database instance.

● The SAP system installation on Windows 2003 (Itanium platform) is only possible with DB2 V9.1.As of DB2 V9.5, the installation of an SAP system on the Windows platform IA64 is no longer supported.

Standalone Host Agent

SAP Instance Installation Required DVDs

Host Agent (Standalone) ■ Installation Master DVD ■ Kernel DVD

2. Make the required installation media available on each installation host.

NOTE

Depending on your installation type, one or more instances can reside on the same host. You

need to keep this in mind when you make the required installation media available on each

installation host.

For a central system, you need to make all required installation media available on the single

installation host.

Use one of the following methods to make media available:

■ Before the installation, copy media manually to local hard disks.

■ During the installation, use the SAPinst Media Browser dialog and copy the entire DVDs to

the path you entered in the Copy Package To column.

4 Preparation

4.10 Preparing the Installation Media

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 67/196

Page 68: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

CAUTION

■ If you copy the DVDs to disk, make sure that the paths to the destination location of the

copied DVDs do not contain any blanks and commas.

■ If you perform a domain installation and do not want to copy the DVDs but use network

drives for mapping the installation DVDs, make sure that the <sapsid>adm user has access

to the UNC paths of the network drives.

Downloading the Installation Media from SAP Service Marketplace

You normally obtain the installation media as part of the installation package from SAP.

However, you can also download installation media from the software distribution center on SAP

Service Marketplace using one of the following paths:

■ http://service.sap.com/swdc Installations and Upgrades My companys application components

<your product> <your product version>

■ http://service.sap.com/swdc Installations and Upgrades A-Z index <first letter of your product>

<your product version>

NOTE

If you download installation media, note that they might be split into several files. In this case,

you have to reassemble the required files after the download.

CAUTION

To extract the downloaded SAR files make sure that you use the latest SAPCAR version, which

you can also download from http://service.sap.com/swdc. You need at least SAPCAR 700. For

more information, see SAP Note 212876.

1. Create a download directory on the host on which you want to run SAPinst.

2. Identify all download objects that belong to one installation DVD according to one or both of the

following:

■ Material number

All download objects that are part of an installation DVD have the same material number and

an individual sequence number:

<material_number>_<sequence_number>

EXAMPLE

51031387_1

51031387_2

...

■ Title

All objects that are part of an DVD have the same title, such as <solution><DVD_name><OS>

or <database>RDBMS<OS> for RDBMS DVDs.

3. Download the objects to the download directory.

4 Preparation

4.10 Preparing the Installation Media

68/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 69: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

4. Extract the individual download objects using SAPCAR, starting with the lowest sequence number

– for example 51031387_1, then 51031387_2, and so on.

During the extraction SAPCAR sets up the structure of the DVD.

NOTE

SAPCAR asks if you want to replace existing files, for example LABELIDX.ASC. Always accept

with Yes.

4 Preparation

4.10 Preparing the Installation Media

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 69/196

Page 70: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides.

Page 71: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

5 Installation

5.1 Installation Checklist

This section includes the installation steps that you have to perform for the following installation

options:

■ Central system

■ Distributed system

■ High-availability system

■ Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps is available in the relevant chapter.

Central System

1. You install the SAP system with SAPinst [page 72].

2. You continue with Post-Installation [page 85].

Distributed System

1. On the central instance host, you run SAPinst [page 72] to prepare the SAP global host.

2. On the database instance host, you run SAPinst [page 72] to install the database instance.

3. On the central instance host, you run SAPinst [page 72] to install the central instance.

4. If required, you install one or more dialog instances on the chosen hosts as described later in this

section.

5. You continue with Post-Installation [page 85].

High-Availability System

1. To install a high-availability system with Microsoft Cluster Service (MSCS), you perform the MSCS-

specific installation tasks [page 143].

2. You continue with Post-Installation [page 85].

Dialog Instance

You perform the following steps on the host where you install the dialog instance.

1. You run SAPinst [page 72] to install the dialog instance.

2. You continue with Post-Installation [page 85].

5 Installation

5.1 Installation Checklist

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 71/196

Page 72: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

5.2 Running SAPinst

This section describes how to run the installation tool SAPinst. SAPinst includes a GUI client and a GUI

server, which both use Java.

This section describes an installation where SAPinst, GUI client, and GUI server are running on the

same host. In the following, GUI client and GUI server are addressed as “SAPinst GUI”.

Useful Information About SAPinst

■ When you start SAPinst, it automatically starts the SAPinst GUI.

■ SAPinst creates the installation directory sapinst_instdir, which is located directly in the %

ProgramFiles% directory. If SAPinst is not able to create sapinst_instdir there, it tries to create

sapinst_instdir in the directory defined by the environment variable TEMP.

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you keep all installation directories until the system is completely and

correctly installed.

■ SAPinst creates a subdirectory for each installation option called sapinst_instdir

\<installation_option_directory>, which is located in %ProgramFiles%.

■ SAPinst extracts itself to a temporary directory called sapinst_exe.xxxxxx.xxxx, which is located

in %TEMP%, %TMP%, %TMPDIR%, or %SystemRoot%. These files are deleted after SAPinst has stopped

running.

The temporary directory sapinst_exe.xxxxxx.xxxx sometimes remains undeleted. You can safely

delete it.

The temporary directory also contains the log file dev_selfex.out from the extraction process,

which might be useful if an error occurs.

CAUTION

If SAPinst cannot find a temporary directory, the installation terminates with the error

FCO-00058.

■ During the installation, the default ports 21200, 21212, and 4239 are used for communication

between SAPinst, GUI server, GUI, and HTTP server, as follows:

● SAPinst uses port 21200 to communicate with the GUI server.

● The GUI server uses port 21212 to communicate with the GUI client.

● 4239 is the port of the HTTP server, which is part of the GUI server.

If the ports for SAPinst and the GUI server are already in use, SAPinst automatically searches for

free port numbers. If the search fails, SAPinst exits.

In this case or if you want SAPinst to use specific ports, open a command prompt and change to

the required directory as follows:

cd /d <DVD drive>:\IM_WINDOWS_<platform>

Execute sapinst.exe with the following command line parameters:

● SAPINST_DIALOG_PORT=<port_number_sapinst_to_gui_server>

5 Installation

5.2 Running SAPinst

72/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 73: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

● GUISERVER_DIALOG_PORT=<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

● GUISERVER_HTTP_PORT=<port_number_http_server>

■ To see a list of all available SAPinst properties, open a command prompt and start SAPinst with

command line parameter -p:

sapinst.exe -p

■ If you need to run SAPinst in accessibility mode, make sure that you have activated and adjusted

accessibility settings as described in Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode [page 82].

■ If required, you can stop SAPinst by choosing SAPinst Cancel in the SAPinst GUI menu.

NOTE

If you need to terminate SAPinst you can do this by choosing File Exit in the menu of

the Program Starter window.

Prerequisites

■ Make sure that you use an account with the required user authorization to run SAPinst [page 61].

■ Make sure that you have specified the most important SAP system parameters as described in Basic

SAP System Installation Parameters [page 36] before you start the installation.

■ If you are installing a second or subsequent SAP system into an existing database (MCOD), make

sure that the database is up and running before starting the installation.

For more information, see Installation of Multiple Components in One Database [page 110].

■ If you want to install a dialog instance to an existing SAP system, make sure that:

● The service definitions for the SAP start services are configured correctly and refer to the

correct profile files.

● There are no profile backup files with an underscore “_” in their profile name. If so, you must

replace the “_” with a “.”.

EXAMPLE

Rename <Drive:>\usr\sap\S14\SYS\profile\S14_DVEBMGS20_wsi6408_12 to

<Drive:>\usr\sap\S14\SYS\profile\S14_DVEBMGS20_wsi6408.12.

Procedure

1. Log on to the installation host using an account with the required user authorization to run SAPinst [page

61].

CAUTION

Do not use an existing <sapsid>adm user.

2. Insert the Installation Master DVD into your DVD drive or mount it locally.

3. Start SAPinst from the Installation Master DVD by double-clicking sapinst.exe from the

following path:

<DVD drive>:\IM_WINDOWS_<your platform>

5 Installation

5.2 Running SAPinst

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 73/196

Page 74: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

If you need to perform the installation in accessibility mode, open a command prompt, change

to the <DVD drive>:\IM_WINDOWS_<platform> directory, and execute sapinst.exe –

accessible.

For more information, see Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode [page 82].

The GUI starts automatically by displaying the Welcome screen.

4. In the Welcome screen, choose your SAP system. You can do either one of the following:

■ Install an SAP system

Choose <Your SAP product> SAP Application Server ABAP <Database> <System Variant>

You can install the following system variants:

System Variants Remarks

Central System Installs an SAP system with all mandatory instances on one host

Distributed System Installs an SAP system with all mandatory instances on different hostsPerform the installation options exactly in the order they appear. You have to restart SAPinst on the relevant host for each installation option.

High-Availability System Installs a high-availability SAP system with all mandatory instances on different hostsPerform the installation options exactly in the order they appear. You have to restart SAPinst on the relevant host for each installation option.

NOTE

When you start the installation from a 32-bit installation master DVD, all you see is the

folder Software Life-Cycle Options on the Welcome screen.

■ Perform other tasks or install additional components

Choose <Your SAP product> Software Life-Cycle Options .

The following software life-cycle options are available:

Software Life-Cycle Installation Options Remarks

Additional Preparation Options

These options comprise the following tasks: ● Host Agent

Installs a standalone host agent. For more information, see Installing the Host Agent Separately [page 117].

● Operating System Users and GroupsCreates all operating system users for your SAP system if they do not yet existRun this installation option before you start the installation of the SAP system.

● Prerequisites CheckChecks your hardware and software requirements before you start the installation. For more information, see Running the Prerequisites Checker in Standalone Mode [page 23].

Application Server Installs one or more dialog instances in an already installed SAP system, if required

Database Tools ● Database Partitions

5 Installation

5.2 Running SAPinst

74/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 75: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Software Life-Cycle Installation Options Remarks

Choose this option if you want to add additional partitions to a database instance in your BW system.For more information, see Adding Additional Partitions to a Database Instance [page 120].

● Install Near Line Storage DatabaseChoose this option if you want to install DB2 as near-line storage database for your BW system.For more information, see Installing DB2 as near-line storage database [page 122] for your BW system.

LDAP Registration Configures the Active Directory and sets up LDAP support for an application server instanceWe recommend you to configure the Active Directory before you install the SAP system or an application server.For more information about LDAP and Active Directory, see Integration of LDAP Directory Services [page 112].

System Copy Performs a system copy

Uninstall Uninstalls your SAP system, standalone engines, or optional standalone unitsFor more information, see Deleting an SAP System [page 133].

5. Choose Next.

6. If SAPinst prompts you to log off from your system, log off and log on again.

SAPinst restarts automatically.

7. Follow the instructions in the SAPinst input screens and enter the required parameters.

NOTE

For more information about the input parameters, position the cursor on the parameter and

press F1 .

After you have entered all requested input parameters, SAPinst displays the Parameter Summary screen.

This screen shows both the parameters that you entered and those that SAPinst set by default. If

required, you can revise the parameters before starting the installation.

Make sure that you check the following parameters depending on the installation type that you

have chosen:

■ If you are performing a typical installation, SAPinst creates by default four sapdata

directories. If you require more or fewer sapdata directories, depending on the storage devices

you are using, you must change this parameter before you start the installation. By selecting

this parameter on the Summary screen and choosing Revise, SAPinst returns to the IBM DB2 for

Linux, UNIX, and Windows –> Sapdata Directories screen.

On this screen, you can also decide if you want SAPinst to create the regular table and index

tablespaces with DB2's automatic storage management enabled. By default, the option for

automatic storage management is preselected.

5 Installation

5.2 Running SAPinst

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 75/196

Page 76: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

As of DB2 V9.1 and higher, the database and the SYSCATSPACE tablespace are always created

with automatic storage management enabled, even if you deselect this option on the

dialog IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows –> Sapdata Directories.

For more information about DB2's automatic storage management, see DB2 Tablespaces [page

50].

■ If you are performing a custom installation, you set these parameters during the Define

Parameters phase of SAPinst.

NOTE

If the tablespace layout used by SAPinst does not meet your requirements, you can create

the tablespaces manually by deselecting the option Create Tablespaces with SAPinst on the

IBM DB2 for Linux and UNIX and Windows Sapdata Directories screen.

During the installation phase, SAPinst then displays the following message:

You must create the tablespaces now. To do so, use the

createTablespaces.sql script that is located in your installation

directory.

To continue the installation, choose OK. Alternatively, you can cancel

SAPinst here and restart it again.

SAPinst does not check the page size of tablespaces that have either been created manually

or that already exist. If you create the tablespaces manually, you must make sure that

you use a page size of 16 KB.

For more information, see Creating Tablespaces Manually [page 119].

8. To start the installation, choose Start.

SAPinst starts the installation and displays the progress of the installation.

9. If required, install a dialog instance for a central system or distributed system.

10. We recommend that you delete the directory %userprofile%\.sdtgui\.

11. If not already done, install the DB2 license.

NOTE

If you have bought your DB2 license from SAP (OEM customers), install the DB2 license as

described in SAP Note 816773.

12. If you copied installation DVDs to your hard disk, you can delete these files when the installation

has successfully completed.

More Information

■ How to Avoid Automatic Logoff by SAPinst [page 77]

■ Interrupted Installation with SAPinst [page 78]

■ Performing a Remote Installation with SAPinst [page 79]

■ Starting SAPinst GUI Separately [page 80]

5 Installation

5.2 Running SAPinst

76/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 77: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode [page 82]

■ Entries in the Services File Created by SAPinst [page 83]

■ Troubleshooting with SAPinst [page 132]

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

The following sections provide additional information about SAPinst:

■ How to Avoid Automatic Logoff by SAPinst [page 77]

■ Interrupted Installation with SAPinst [page 78]

■ Performing a Remote Installation with SAPinst [page 79]

■ Starting SAPinst GUI Separately [page 80]

■ Running SAPinst with Accessibility Mode [page 82]

■ Entries in the Services File Created by SAPinst [page 83]

5.3.1 How to Avoid Automatic Logoff by SAPinst

When you install the SAP system with SAPinst, the SAPinst installation tool checks whether the user

account used for the installation has the required privileges and authorization.

For a domain installation, the account needs to be both a member of the local Administrators group

and the domain Admins group. For a local installation, the account needs to be a member of the local

group Administrators group.

In both cases, the user account must be authorized to do the following:

■ Act as part of the operating system

■ Adjust memory quotas for a process

■ Replace a process level token

If the user account does not have these rights assigned, SAPinst assigns them and automatically logs

the account off to activate them. To avoid SAPinst logging the account off, you can set these rights

manually before you start the installation.

Procedure

You perform the following steps to assign these rights to the user account used for the installation.

CAUTION

Be aware that domain policies override locally defined policies. This means that if you want to

grant domain administrator rights to a user who belongs to the local Administrators group,

make sure that you have also defined domain administrator rights for this user on domain level.

1. Choose Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Local Security Policy .

2. In the Local Security Settings window, choose Local Policies User Rights Assignment. .

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 77/196

Page 78: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. Double-click the required right under Policy and choose Add User or Group.

4. In the Select Users and Groups window, choose the required user and choose Add.

The selected user appears in the box below.

5. Confirm your entry and then repeat the steps for each remaining policy that the user requires for

the installation.

6. Log off and log on again to apply the changes.

More Information

Required User Authorization for Running SAPinst [page 61]

5.3.2 Interrupted Installation with SAPinst

The SAP system installation might be interrupted for one of the following reasons:

■ An error occurred during the Define Parameters or Execute phase:

SAPinst does not abort the installation in error situations. If an error occurs, the installation pauses

and a dialog box appears. The dialog box contains a short description of the choices listed in the

table below as well as a path to a log file that contains detailed information about the error.

■ You interrupted the installation by choosing Cancel in the SAPinst menu.

CAUTION

If you stop an option in the Execute phase, any system or component installed by this option

is incomplete and not ready to be used. Any system or component uninstalled by this option

is not completely uninstalled.

The following table describes the options in the dialog box:

Option Definition

Retry SAPinst retries the installation from the point of failure without repeating any of the previous steps.This is possible because SAPinst records the installation progress in the keydb.xml file.We recommend that you view the entries in the log files, try to solve the problem, and then choose Retry.If the same or a different error occurs, SAPinst displays the same dialog box again.

Stop SAPinst stops the installation, closing the dialog box, the SAPinst GUI, and the GUI server.SAPinst records the installation progress in the keydb.xml file. Therefore, you can continue the installation from the point of failure without repeating any of the previous steps (see the procedure below).

Continue SAPinst continues the installation from the current point.

View Log Access installation log files.

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

78/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 79: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure

This procedure describes the steps to restart an installation, which you stopped by choosing Stop, or to

continue an interrupted installation after an error situation.

1. Log on as a user who is a member of the local administrators group.

2. Insert the Installation Master DVD in your DVD drive.

3. Change to the required directory:

<DVD drive>:\IM_WINDOWS_<platform>

4. Double-click sapinst.exe.

5. From the tree structure in the Welcome screen, select the installation option that you want to

continue and choose Next.

The What do you want to do? screen appears.

6. In the What do you want to do? screen, decide between the following alternatives and continue with

Next:

Alternative Behavior

Run a new option SAPinst does not continue the interrupted installation option. Instead, it moves the content of the old installation directory and all installation-specific files to a backup directory. Afterwards, you can no longer continue the old installation option.For the backup directory, the following naming convention is used:<log_day_month_year_hours_minutes_seconds>

EXAMPLE

log_01_Oct_2008_13_47_56

CAUTION

SAPinst moves all the files and folders to a new log directory, even if these files and folders are owned by other users. If there are any processes currently running on these files and folders, they might no longer function properly.

Continue with the old option SAPinst continues the interrupted installation option from the point of failure.

5.3.3 Performing a Remote Installation with SAPinst

You use this procedure to install your SAP system on a remote host. In this case, SAPinst runs on the

remote host, and the SAPinst GUI runs on the local host. The local host is the host from which you

control the installation with the SAPinst GUI. The SAPinst GUI connects using a secure SSL connection

to SAPinst.

Alternatively you can use an X server for Microsoft Windows or other remote desktop tools such as

VNC Viewer or NX Server / NX Client – offered by various vendors or open source – for remote access

to SAPinst GUI on Windows workstations. We recommend that you use the Hummingbird Exceed X

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 79/196

Page 80: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Server, which we use to validate installations with SAPinst. For more information, see SAP Note

1170809.

You can run the SAPinst GUI on a PC with 32-bit while SAPinst is running on a 64-bit installation host.

For more information, see Starting SAPinst GUI Separately [page 80].

Prerequisites

■ The remote host meets the prerequisites for starting SAPinst as described in Running SAPinst [page

72]

■ Both computers are in the same network and can ping each other.

To test this:

1. Log on to your remote host and enter the command ping <local host>.

2. Log on to the local host and enter the command ping <remote host>.

Procedure

1. Log on to your remote host as a user that is a member of the local administrators group.

2. Insert the Installation Master DVD in the DVD drive on your remote host.

3. Open a command prompt and change to the required directory by entering the following

commands:

cd /d <DVD drive>:\IM_WINDOWS_<platform>

Execute sapinst.exe -nogui

SAPinst now starts and waits for the connection to the SAPinst GUI. You see the following at the

command prompt:

guiengine: no GUI connected; waiting for a connection on host <host_name>, port

<port_number> to continue with the installation

4. Start the SAPinst GUI on your local host as described in Starting SAPinst GUI Separately [page 80].

5.3.4 Starting SAPinst GUI Separately

You use this procedure to start the SAPinst GUI separately. You need to start the SAPinst GUI separately

in the following cases:

■ You closed the SAPinst GUI using File Exit from the SAPinst menu while SAPinst is still

running.

■ You want to perform a remote installation, where the SAPinst GUI runs on a different host from

SAPinst. For more information, see Performing a Remote Installation with SAPinst [page 79].

Prerequisites

The host on which you want to start the SAPinst GUI meets the prerequisites for starting SAPinst as

described in Running SAPinst [page 72].

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

80/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 81: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure

Starting SAPinst GUI on Windows

1. Insert the SAP Installation Master DVD into your DVD drive.

2. Change to the directory of the sapinstgui executable:

<Drive>:\<Installation_Master_DVD>\IM_WINDOWS_<platform>

NOTE

If you want to start the SAPinst GUI on a Windows 32-bit operating system, change to the

following directory:

<Drive>:\<Installation_Master_DVD>\IM_WINDOWS_I386

3. Start the SAPinst GUI from a command prompt by executing sapinstgui.exe with the relevant

command line parameters:

■ If you want to perform a remote installation, execute the following command:

sapinstgui.exe -host <remote_host> -port

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

– where <remote_host> is the name of the remote host, and

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client> is the port the GUI server uses to communicate

with the GUI client (21212 by default).

■ If you closed the SAPinst GUI using File Exit and want to reconnect to SAPinst, proceed

as follows:

● If you are performing a local installation with SAPinst and SAPinst GUI running on the

same host, execute the following command:

sapinstgui.exe -port <port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

– where <port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client> is the port the GUI server uses to

communicate with the GUI client (21212 by default).

● If you are performing a remote installation with SAPinst and SAPinst GUI running on

different hosts, execute the following command:

sapinstgui.exe -host <remote_host> -port

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

– where <remote_host> is the name of the remote host, and

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client> is the port the GUI server uses to

communicate with the GUI client (21212 by default).

The SAPinst GUI starts and connects to SAPinst.

Starting SAPinst GUI on UNIX

1. Mount the Installation Master DVD.

NOTE

Mount the DVD locally.

We do not recommend that you use Network File System (NFS).

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 81/196

Page 82: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

2. Change to the directory of the sapinstgui executable by entering the following command:

cd <Mountpoint of Installation Master DVD>/IM_<OS>

NOTE

If you want to start the SAPinst GUI on a Linux 32–bit platform, enter the following command:

cd <Mountpoint of Installation Master DVD>/IM_LINUX_I386

3. Start the SAPinst GUI by executing ./sapinstgui with the relevant command line parameters:

■ If you want to perform a remote installation, execute the following command:

./sapinstgui -host <remote_host> -port <port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

– where <remote_host> is the name of the remote host, and

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client> is the port the GUI server uses to communicate

with the GUI client (21212 by default).

■ If you closed the SAPinst GUI using File Exit and want to reconnect to SAPinst, proceed

as follows:

● If you are performing a local installation with SAPinst and SAPinst GUI running on the

same host, execute the following command:

sapinstgui -port <port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

– where <port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client> is the port the GUI server uses to

communicate with the GUI client (21212 by default).

● If you are performing a remote installation with SAPinst and SAPinst GUI running on

different hosts, execute the following command:

sapinstgui -host <remote_host> -port

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

– where <remote_host> is the name of the remote host, and

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client> is the port the GUI server uses to

communicate with the GUI client (21212 by default).

The SAPinst GUI starts and connects to SAPinst.

5.3.5 Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode

You can also run SAPinst in accessibility mode. The following features are available:

■ Keyboard access:

This feature is generally available for all operating systems.

■ High-contrast color:

This feature is derived from the Windows display properties. You can use it either for a local

installation or for a remote installation.

■ Custom font setting:

This feature is derived from the Windows display properties. You can use it either for a local

installation or for a remote installation.

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

82/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 83: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure

Activating and Adjusting Accessibility Settings on Windows

You first have to activate and adjust the relevant settings for the font size and color schemes before

you start SAPinst or the SAPinst GUI.

NOTE

The following procedure applies for Windows Server 2008 and might be different when using

another Windows operating system.

1. Right click on your Windows desktop and choose Personalize.

2. Select Adjust font size (DPI) and choose Larger scale (120 DPI).

To define other font size schemes, choose Custom DPI.

3. In the right-hand pane, select Window Color and Appearance.

Select a color scheme from the Color scheme drop-down box.

To define your own color schemes, choose Advanced.

Running SAPinst in Accessibility Mode

You can either perform a local installation, where SAPinst and SAPinst GUI are running on the same

host, or a remote installation, where SAPinst and SAPinst GUI are running on different hosts.

■ Local installation:

Start SAPinst as described in Running SAPinst [page 72] by executing the following command:

sapinst.exe –accessible

■ Remote installation:

1. Start SAPinst on the remote host by executing the following command from the command

line as described in Performing a Remote Installation with SAPinst [page 79]:

sapinst.exe –nogui

2. Start SAPinst GUI on the local host by executing the following command from the command

line as described in Starting the SAPinst GUI Separately for a Remote Installation [page 80]:

sapinstgui.exe -accessible –host <remote_host> -port

<port_number_gui_server_to_gui_client>

5.3.6 Entries in the Services File Created by SAPinst

After the installation has finished successfully, SAPinst has created the following entries for port names

in <drive:>\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\services:

sapdp<nn> = 32<nn>/tcp

sapdp<nn>s = 47<nn>/tcp

sapgw<nn> = 33<nn>/tcp

sapgw<nn>s = 48<nn>/tcp

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 83/196

Page 84: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

sapms<SAPSID> = 36<nn>/tcp (unless you specified another value during the installation)

NOTE

■ <nn> is the instance number. There is a port created for every possible instance number,

regardless of which instance number you specified during the installation. For example, for

sapgw<nn> = 33<nn>/tcp the following range of entries is created:

sapgw00 = 3300/tcp

sapgw01 = 3301/tcp

sapgw02 = 3302/tcp

[...]

sapgw98 = 3398/tcp

sapgw99 = 3399/tcp

■ If there is more than one entry for the same port number, this is not an error.

5 Installation

5.3 Additional Information About SAPinst

84/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 85: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

6 Post-Installation

6.1 Post-Installation Checklist

This section includes the post-installation steps that you have to perform for the following installation

options:

■ Central, distributed, or high-availability system

■ Dialog instance

Detailed information about the steps is available in the relevant chapter.

Central, Distributed, or High-Availability System

NOTE

In a central system, all mandatory instances are installed on one host. Therefore, if you are

installing a central system, you can ignore references to other hosts.

You have to complete the following post-installation steps, which are described in more detail in the

linked chapters:

1. If required, you perform a full system backup [page 98] immediately after the installation has finished.

2. You check whether you can log on to the application server [page 86].

NOTE

In a distributed or high-availability system, you check whether you can log on to every

instance of the SAP system that you installed.

3. You install the SAP license [page 87].

4. You apply the latest kernel and Support Package stacks [page 88].

5. Windows Server 2008 (R2): If required, you set up symbolic links for application servers [page 88].

6. You configure the remote connection to SAP support [page 89].

7. You install the SAP Online Documentation [page 89].

8. You perform post-installation steps for the ABAP application server [page 89].

9. You ensure user security [page 94].

10. You enable the database for monitoring [page 97].

11. You enable recoverability of the database [page 97].

12. To connect your SAP system to an existing central system landscape directory (SLD), you configure

the connection to a central System Landscape Directory (SLD) [page 99].

13. You implement SAP ERP ABAP Add-On Components [page 99].

14. You perform the client copy [page 99].

6 Post-Installation

6.1 Post-Installation Checklist

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 85/196

Page 86: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

15. If you want or need to implement the E2E Root Cause Analysis scenario, you have to perform post-

installation steps for the Diagnostics Agent [page 100] on your central and dialog instances.

16. You perform a full installation backup [page 98].

Dialog Instance

You have to complete the following post-installation steps, which are described in more detail in the

linked chapters:

1. If required, you perform a full system backup [page 98] immediately after the installation has finished.

2. You check whether you can log on to the application server [page 86] of the dialog instance.

3. You configure user management [page 87].

4. You ensure user security [page 94].

5. Windows Server 2008 (R2): If required, you set up symbolic links for application servers [page 88].

6. You install the SAP Online Documentation [page 89].

7. You enable recoverability of the database [page 97].

8. You activate the Internet Pricing and Configurator [page 99].

9. You implement SAP ERP ABAP Add-On Components [page 99].

10. You perform a full installation backup [page 98].

6.2 Logging On to the Application Server

You need to check that you can log on to the SAP system with the standard users, given in the table

below.

ABAP Users

User User Name Client

SAP system user SAP* 000, 001, 066

DDIC 000, 001

Prerequisites

■ The SAP system is up and running.

■ You have already installed a front end.

Procedure

Logging On to the ABAP Application Server

1. Start SAP Logon on the host where you have installed the front end as follows:

■ SAP GUI for Windows:

Choose Start All Programs SAP Front End SAP Logon .

■ SAP GUI for Java:

Choose Start All Programs SAP Clients SAP GUI for Java<Release> .

6 Post-Installation

6.2 Logging On to the Application Server

86/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 87: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

You can alternatively enter the command guilogon in the SAP GUI installation directory

to start SAP GUI for Java.

The SAP Logon appears.

2. Create a logon entry for the newly installed system in the SAP Logon.

For more information about creating new logon entries, press F1 .

3. When you have created the entry, log on as user SAP* or DDIC.

6.3 Configuring User Management

After the installation of your SAP system has finished, you must decide whether you want to do the

following:

■ Add the system to Central User Administration (CUA)

■ Use Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) synchronization

For more information, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management Identity Management for

System Landscapes Integration of User Management in Your System Landscape Adding an ABAP System to Your System

Landscape

6.4 Installing the SAP License

You must install a permanent SAP license. When you install your SAP system, a temporary license

is automatically installed.

CAUTION

Before the temporary license expires, you must apply for a permanent license key from SAP.

We recommend that you apply for a permanent license key as soon as possible after installing

your system.

ProcedureInstall the SAP license as described in the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library Technology Consultant's Guide Cross-NetWeaver Configurations SAP License Keys

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

NOTE

The license key is bound to the hardware key of the host where the message server is running.

In a high-availability system with MSCS, the message server is part of the (A)SCS instance that

can run on different MSCS node. Therefore you must install the SAP license on both nodes.

6 Post-Installation

6.3 Configuring User Management

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 87/196

Page 88: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

You have to do failover from the first MSCS node where the (A)SCS instance is installed to the

second MSCS node. Use the hardware key of the second MSCS node for the installation of the

second SAP license.

End of: HA (MSCS) |

More Information

For more information about SAP license keys and how to obtain them, see

http://service.sap.com/licensekey.

6.5 Applying the Latest Kernel and Support Package Stacks

We strongly recommend that you apply the latest kernel and Support Package stacks from SAP Service

Marketplace before you start configuring your SAP system.

Prerequisites

Make sure that you read the release notes for your SAP system before you apply Support Package stacks.

The release notes might include information about steps you have to perform after you have applied

the Support Package stacks. For more information, see http://service.sap.com/releasenotes.

Procedure

Download and apply the latest kernel and Support Package stacks as described in the SAP NetWeaver 7.0

– Support Package Stack Guide <current version> at http://service.sap.com/maintenancenw70

For up-to-date release information on SAP NetWeaver Support Package stacks, see SAP Note 789220.

For up-to-date release information on Support Package stacks, see SAP Note 849887.

NOTE

If the central instance host and the dialog instance host run on different operating systems or

platforms, all application servers must have the same kernel patch level.

6.6 Creating Symbolic Links on Windows Server 2008 (R2) for Application Servers

With Windows Server 2008 (R2), you can create symbolic links for dialog instances to simplify their

administration.

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

In a high-availability system, you can additionally create symbolic links for the central instance.End of: HA (MSCS) |

Symbolic links for application servers let you access from your local host the SYS directory that is located

on the global host, without having to specify its UNC path. Instead you can browse, for example, in

the Windows explorer on your local host to the SYS directory and its subdirectories on the global host.

6 Post-Installation

6.5 Applying the Latest Kernel and Support Package Stacks

88/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 89: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure

To create symbolic links, perform the following steps:

1. In the Start menu, right-click on Command Prompt and choose Run as administrator.

2. Enter the following command in a single line:

mklink /d <localdisk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS \\<sapglobalhost>\sapmnt\<SAPSID>\SYS

NOTE

Enter a blank before \\<sapglobalhost>\....

3. If you use a central transport directory, you can also create the following link:

mklink /d <localdisk>:\usr\sap\trans \\<trans_dir_host>\sapmnt\trans

NOTE

The transport directory host <trans_dir_host> and the <sapglobalhost> can be identical.

CAUTION

The command mklink creates the link without checking whether the link target exists or is

accessible. If the link does not work after you created it, make sure that it exists and check the

accessibility of the UNC path.

6.7 Configuring Remote Connection to SAP Support

SAP offers its customers access to support and to a number of remote services such as the SAP EarlyWatch

service or the SAP GoingLive service. Therefore, you have to set up a remote network connection to

SAP. For more information, see SAP Service Marketplace at http://service.sap.com/

remoteconnection.

6.8 Installing the SAP Online Documentation

SAP currently provides an HTML-based solution for the online documentation, including the

Application Help, Glossary, Implementation Guide (IMG), and Release Notes. You can display the

documentation with a Java-compatible Web browser on all front-end platforms supported by SAP.

Process

Install the SAP online documentation in your SAP system as described in the README.TXT file contained

in the root directory of the online documentation DVD, delivered as part of the installation package.

6.9 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application Server

You have to perform the following post-installation steps for the ABAP application server:

■ Perform a consistency check

6 Post-Installation

6.7 Configuring Remote Connection to SAP Support

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 89/196

Page 90: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ Maintain your company address for initial users

■ Configure the transport management system

■ Perform basic operations

■ Configure system parameters

■ Configure the number of work processes

■ Install languages and performing language transport

■ Configure the integrated Internet Transaction Server (ITS)

■ Make your newly installed SAP system known to your SAP Solution Manager

■ Configure AS ABAP to support Secure Socket Layer (SSL)

■ Configure Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDN)

■ Configure business applications

For more information, see the appropriate sections below.

PrerequisitesYou have logged on to the ABAP application server as described in Logging On to the Application Server [page

86].

Procedure

Performing a Consistency Check

We recommend that you check the consistency of the newly installed SAP ABAP system. When logging

on to the system for the first time, you need to trigger a consistency check manually. The function is

then called automatically whenever you start the system or an application server.

This checks the following:

■ Completeness of installation

■ Version compatibility between the SAP release and the operating system

The initial consistency check determines whether:

● The release number in the SAP kernel matches the release number defined in the database

system

● The character set specified in the SAP kernel matches the character set specified in the database

system

● Critical structure definitions that are defined in both the data dictionary and the SAP kernel

are identical. The structures checked by this function include SYST, T100, TSTC, TDCT, and

TFDIR.

■ Accessibility of the message server

■ Availability of all work process types

■ Information about the enqueue server and the update service

To perform a consistency check, you can either call transaction SICK (SAP initial consistency check)

or choose Tools Administration Administration Installation Check from the menu.

For more information, see the SAP Library at:

6 Post-Installation

6.9 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application Server

90/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 91: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System

Management Tools for Monitoring the System Consistency Check

Maintaining Your Company Address for Initial Users

Maintain your company address in your ABAP system using transaction SU01 as described in the SAP

Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability Business Services

Business Address Services (BC-SRV-ADR) Addresses in User Administration Maintenance of Address Data

NOTE

You must maintain your company address to create ABAP system users.

Configuring the Transport Management System

You have to perform some steps to be able to use the Transport Management System.

1. Perform post-installation steps for the transport organizer:

1. Call transaction SE06.

2. Select Standard Installation.

3. Choose Perform Post-Installation Actions.

2. Call transaction STMS in the ABAP system to configure the domain controller in the Transport

Management System (TMS).

For more information, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software

Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System

Performing Basic Operations

1. Go to the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability

2. Choose the relevant sections to perform the following operations:

Operation Section in SAP Documentation

Set up operation modes – transaction RZ04

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management ConfigurationOperation Modes

Set up logon groups – transaction SMLG

Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management ConfigurationLogon Load Balancing SAP Logon

Set up administrators Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management Background Processing Authorizations for Background Processing

Schedule background jobs Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management Background Processing

6 Post-Installation

6.9 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application Server

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 91/196

Page 92: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Operation Section in SAP Documentation

Install a printer Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management SAP Printing Guide

Configure the system log Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management Tools for Monitoring the System System log Configuring the System Log

Set up the DBA Planning Calendar and schedule the required jobs, for example, for backup and recovery, reorganization of tables and indexes.

See the document Database Administration Using the DBA Cockpit at http://

service.sap.com/instguidesnw70 Operations Database-Specific Guides .

Configuring System Parameters

For more information about system profiles, which is where work processes and profile parameters are

defined, and how to configure them, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System

Management Tools for Monitoring the System Configuration Profiles

Checking the Configured Number of Work Processes

SAPinst installs ABAP systems with a minimum number of work processes. This is only an initial

configuration so that you can start working after the installation. You have to adapt the number of

work processes in a production system to the system resources and the number of users working in

each ABAP system application

For more information about how to configure work processes, see the SAP Library at http://

help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP NetWeaver

Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability System Management

Tools for Monitoring the System Displaying and Controlling Work Processes

Configuring Kernel Parameters

To configure your kernel parameters, follow the recommendations in SAP Notes 146289 and 835474.

Installing Languages and Performing Language Transports

■ Install languages using transaction I18N:

● If you want to use English only, you must activate the default language settings once.

● If you want to use languages other than English, you must install them and activate the

language settings.

For more information about configuring the language settings, see the online documentation in

transaction I18N at I18N Menue I18N Customizing .

■ Perform language transport using transaction SMLT as described in the SAP Library at:

6 Post-Installation

6.9 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application Server

92/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 93: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability

Software Life Cycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System Language Transport

Using and Configuring the SAP ITS Integrated ICM

The SAP Internet Transaction Server (SAP ITS) is integrated in the SAP NetWeaver Application Server

ABAP (AS ABAP) as an Internet Communication Framework (ICF) service. You can access this, like

other services, with the Internet Communication Manager (ICM). With the SAP ITS integrated in AS

ABAP, the Web browser now communicates directly with the SAP system. Furthermore, all SAP ITS-

related sources, such as service files, HTML templates, or MIME files, are now stored in the database of

the system.

The SAP ITS supports the following functions:

■ SAP GUI for HTML

■ Internet Application Component (IAC) runtime or Web Transaction technology

For more information about how to configure the integrated SAP ITS, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology SAP ITS in the SAP NetWeaver Application Server Configuration

Making your Newly Installed SAP System Known to your SAP Solution Manager

Make your newly installed SAP system known to your SAP Solution Manager as described in the SAP

Library at:

http://help.sap.com SAP Solution Manager SAP Solution Manager <Release of your SAP Solution Manager

system> SAP Solution Manager Basic Settings Solution Manager System Landscape Create Systems

Configuring AS ABAP to Support Secure Socket Layer (SSL)

If you installed the SAP Cryptographic Library – see Basic SAP System Installation Parameters [page 36] – you

have to configure AS ABAP to support Secure Socket Layer (SSL), as described in the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security System Security System Security for SAP Web

AS ABAP Only Trust Manager Example Configuring the SAP Web AS for Supporting SSL

Configuring Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDN)

If you want to use Web Dynpro ABAP as UI technology and you assigned a DNS Domain Name to your

SAP System – see Basic SAP System Installation Parameters [page 36] – you have to perform the required

configuration steps.

For more information, see SAP Note 654982 and the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) SAP NetWeaver

Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology UI

6 Post-Installation

6.9 Performing Post-Installation Steps for the ABAP Application Server

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 93/196

Page 94: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Technology Web UI Technology Web Dynpro ABAP Web Dynpro ABAP Configuration Fully Qualified Domain

Names (FQDN)

Configuring Business Applications

Prepare the SAP system for using business applications, which includes customizing the ABAP system

and the business components, as described in the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability

Customizing

6.10 Ensuring User Security

You need to ensure the security of the users that SAPinst created during the installation. The tables

below at the end of this section list these users:

■ Operating system users

■ SAP system users

During the installation, SAPinst by default assigned the master password to all users created during the

installation unless you specified other passwords.

If you change user passwords, be aware that SAP system users might exist in multiple SAP system clients

(for example, if a user was copied as part of the client copy). Therefore, you need to change the passwords

in all the relevant SAP system clients.

CAUTION

SAPinst applied the master password to users SAP* and DDIC only for SAP system clients 000 and

001, but not to users SAP*, DDIC, and EARLYWATCH in client 066.

Instead, SAPinst always assigns the following passwords to these users in client 066:

SAP*: 06071992

EARLYWATCH: support

See also Master Password in Basic SAP System Installation Parameters [page 36].

RECOMMENDATION

User ID and password are encoded only when transported across the network. Therefore, we

recommend using encryption at the network layer, either by using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)

protocol for HTTP connections or Secure Network Communications (SNC) for the SAP protocols

dialog and RFC.

For more information, see:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer

Security

6 Post-Installation

6.10 Ensuring User Security

94/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 95: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

CAUTION

Make sure that you perform this procedure before the newly installed SAP system goes into

production. For security reasons, you also need to copy the installation directory to a separate,

secure location – such as a DVD – and then delete the installation directory.

Procedure

For the users listed below, take the precautions described in the relevant SAP security guide, which you

can find at http://service.sap.com/securityguide:

Operating System Users

After the installation, operating system users for SAP system, database, diagnostics agent, and host

agent are available as listed in the following table:

Host Agent User

User User Name Comment

Operating system user

sapadm SAP system administratorYou do not need to change the password of this user after the installation.This user is for administration purposes only.

SAP System Users

After the installation, ABAP system users are available. The following table shows these users together

with recommendations on how you can ensure the security of these users.

ABAP Users

User User Name Comment

SAP system user SAP* User exists in at least SAP system clients 000, 001, and 066

CAUTION

This user has extensive authorizations. Make sure that you assign a secure password.

DDIC User exists in at least SAP system clients 000 and 001

CAUTION

This user has extensive authorizations. Make sure that you assign a secure password.

EARLYWATCH User exists in at least SAP system client 066

SAPCPIC User exists in at least SAP system clients 000 and 001

6 Post-Installation

6.10 Ensuring User Security

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 95/196

Page 96: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

More InformationFor more information about managing ABAP users, see:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) SAP NetWeaver

Library Security Identity Management User and Role Administration of AS ABAP

6.11 Enabling the Database for Monitoring

After the SAP system installation, you must enable the database for monitoring by setting up a data

collection framework (DCF). The DCF provides a time-based collection and evaluation of performance,

configuration, and space-related data. The DCF consists of the following:

■ A set of tables holding history data

■ Tablespaces to store these monitoring tables

■ A set of stored procedures to collect data on a regular basis

These stored procedures are scheduled by the DB2 administrative task scheduler (ATS).

ProcedureIn your SAP system, call transaction DBACOCKPIT to start the DBA Cockpit. Calling the DBA Cockpit

automatically checks the existence of the DCF:

■ If you installed the database with automatic storage management, calling the DBA Cockpit

automatically installs the DCF.

RECOMMENDATION

To make sure that the DCF was set up correctly, we recommend that you go to the Collector

Configuration screen to check the status of the DCF.

■ If you installed the database without automatic storage management, proceed as follows:

1. On the Database tab page of the DBA Cockpit, choose Configuration Data Collection Framework

Collector Configuration .

2. Set up and configure the DCF as described in section Enabling the Database for the Data Collection

Framework in the Database Administration Guide: Database Administration Using the DBA Cockpit.

CAUTION

Any error during the installation process can result in the DCF not being automatically installed.

For example, if the installation failed due to missing tablespaces, create these tablespaces first and

retry the installation. If the installation completes successfully, the DCF also has been installed

and is available for monitoring.

More InformationDatabase Administration Guide: Database Administration Using the DBA Cockpit - IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and

Windows at:

http://service.sap.com/instguidesnw <Your SAP NetWeaver Release> Operations Database-

Specific Guides

6 Post-Installation

6.11 Enabling the Database for Monitoring

96/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 97: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

6.12 Enabling Recoverability of the Database

CAUTION

This section applies only to your database. You only have to perform the steps outlined in this

section once – even if you install multiple SAP systems into one database.

Roll forward recovery provides the ability to recover lost data due to media failure, such as hard disk

failure, and applies log file information (log journal) against the restored database. These log files contain

the changes made to the database since the last backup.

CAUTION

A production system must run in log retention mode.

If a system is not running in log retention mode, all changes applied to the database since the last

complete backup are lost in the event of a disk failure.

In log retention mode, the log files remain in the log directory (log_dir). To archive the log files, you

can use DB2s own log file management solution. For more information, see the documentation Database

Administration Guide - SAP on IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

Procedure

1. Log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid>.

2. To activate log retention mode and to specify the log archiving method, you must set configuration

parameter LOGARCHMETH1 to one of the following options:

■ LOGRETAIN

No log archiving takes place. Log files remain in the log directory.

■ DISK:<log_archive_path>

Log files are archived to a disk location. You can archive them to tape using the DB2 tape

manager (db2tapemgr) at a later point in time.

■ TSM:<TSM_management_class>

Log files are archived to Tivoli Storage Management (TSM)

■ USEREXIT

For downward compatibility with the former user exit concept, you can specify value

USEREXIT for parameter LOGARCHMETH1.

■ VENDOR:<path_to_vendor_lib>

Log files are archived to a library that is provided by your vendor storage management.

To set configuration parameter LOGARCHMETH1 for your preferred archiving method, enter the

following command:

db2 update db cfg for <dbsid> using LOGARCHMETH1 <log_archiving_method>

For more information, see the documentation Database Administration Guide - SAP on IBM DB2 for Linux,

UNIX, and Windows.

6 Post-Installation

6.12 Enabling Recoverability of the Database

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 97/196

Page 98: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. To activate the settings, you must restart the database. The database is now in backup pending

mode. You need to take an offline backup before you can continue.

4. If you plan to make a backup to tape on Windows, you have to initialize the tape drive by entering

the following command:

db2 initialize tape on \\.\<tape_device>

5. To start the offline backup for a single-partitioned database, enter the following command:

db2 backup db <dbsid> to <device>

EXAMPLE

For example, to perform an offline backup of database C11 to tapes in devices TAPE0 and

TAPE1, enter the following command:

db2 backup database C11 to \\.\TAPE0, \\.\TAPE1

NOTE

On a multipartitioned database, you must activate log retention mode on all database partitions.

In addition, you also have to perform an offline backup for all database partitions.

For more information about how to start a DB2 backup, see the DB2 online documentation.

More Information

■ Database Administration Guide - SAP on IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows at:

http://service.sap.com/instguidesnw70 Operations Database-Specific Guides .

■ For direct access to online information about DB2 that is provided by IBM, see Online Information from

IBM [page 187].

■ For access to more documentation for SAP systems on DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows, see

Online Information from SAP [page 185].

6.13 Performing a Full System Backup

You must perform a full system backup after the configuration of your SAP system. If required, you

can also perform a full system backup after the installation (recommended). In addition, we

recommend you to regularly back up your database.

Prerequisites

■ You are logged on as user <sapsid>adm.

■ You have shut down the SAP system and database.

Procedure

1. Back up the operating system, all SAP components, and all file systems that are not related to the

database

6 Post-Installation

6.13 Performing a Full System Backup

98/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 99: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

2. Perform a database offline backup as described in the IBM DB2 documentation. For more

information, see Online Information from IBM [page 187].

6.14 Configuring the Connection to a Central System Landscape Directory

For each system in your landscape that reports data to a central System Landscape Directory (SLD),

you have to configure a corresponding SLD data supplier.

Procedure

Configure the SLD data suppliers and the API for the SLD as described in the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software

Life Cycle Management System Landscape Directory Configuring Systems to Connect to SLD

More Information

This documentation is also available in PDF form in the User Manual – SLD of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 at:

http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/nw-sld

6.15 Activating Internet Pricing and Configurator

If you want to use Internet Pricing and Configurator, you have to enable the Virtual Machine Container

(VMC).

Procedure

To enable the VMC, proceed as described in SAP Note 854170.

6.16 Implementing SAP ERP ABAP Add-On Components

You can install several Add-On Components to your SAP ERP ABAP system.

Procedure

You can find a detailed description on how to implement each available SAP ERP Add-On Component

in the related SAP Notes on SAP Service Marketplace at https://service.sap.com/erp-inst SAP

ERP 6.0 SAP Notes .

6.17 Performing the Client Copy

SAPinst creates three ABAP clients during the installation, client 000, client 001, and client 066.

Client 000 is the SAP reference client for ABAP.

6 Post-Installation

6.14 Configuring the Connection to a Central System Landscape Directory

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 99/196

Page 100: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Use client 000 as source client for the client copy.

Procedure1. Maintain the new client with transaction SCC4.

2. Activate kernel user SAP*:

1. Set the profile parameter login/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 0.

2. Restart the application server.

3. Log on to the new client with kernel user SAP* and password PASS.

4. Copy the client with transaction SCCL and profile SAP_CUST.

5. Check the log files with transaction SCC3.

6. Create the required users. These users must have at least the authorizations required for user

administration and system administration. Create a user SAP* with all required authorizations for

this user. If you want to have other users for system administration, you can also create user

SAP* without authorizations.

7. Deactivate kernel user SAP*:

1. Reset login/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 1.

2. Restart the application server.

More InformationFor more information about the client copy and about how to perform it, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability Software

Lifecycle Management Software Logistics Change and Transport System BC – Client Copy and Transport

6.18 Post-Installation Steps for the Diagnostics Agent

The Solution Manager Diagnostics Agent (diagnostics agent) is the remote component of the E2E Root

Cause Analysis. It allows you to perform a connection between SAP Solution Manager as the managing

system and the managed system(s) and then to gather information from the managed systems and

reports them to the Solution Manager system.

To implement the E2E Root Cause Analysis scenario, you have to configure the diagnostics agents on

the application server instances of your SAP system.

ProcedureProceed as described at http://service.sap.com/diagnostics.

6.19 Post-Installation Steps for the Host Agent

You have to perform the following steps on each host where the host agent is installed. This applies

whether the host agent is installed on a host within the SAP system or standalone on another host.

6 Post-Installation

6.18 Post-Installation Steps for the Diagnostics Agent

100/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 101: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure

1. Log on as user sapadm.

2. Check whether the following services are available:

■ The control program saphostexec

■ The SAP NetWeaver Management agent SAPHostControl (sapstartsrv in host mode)

NOTE

When the host is booted, the services SAPHostControl and SAPHostExec automatically start

the installed programs

3. Configure the host agent according to your requirements.

More Information

For more information, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle

Management by Key Capability Solution Monitoring Monitoring in the CCMS Infrastructure of the NetWeaver

Management Agents

6.20 Accessing Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager

To access configuration documentation in SAP Solution Manager, you have to connect your newly

installed SAP system to SAP Solution Manager.

NOTE

For SAP NetWeaver, you can also find configuration documentation in the Technology Consultant's

Guide at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library Technology Consultant's Guide

Procedure

Create a configuration project with the related configuration guide as described in the following

documentation:

http://help.sap.com SAP Solutions SAP Solution Manager Documentation for SAP Solution Manager

<current release> SAP Solution Manager Implementing and Upgrading SAP Solutions Projects

Configuration .

More Information

http://service.sap.com/solutionmanager Media Library How-To Documents How to Create a

Configuration Guide using SAP Solution Manager

6 Post-Installation

6.20 Accessing Configuration Documentation in SAP Solution Manager

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 101/196

Page 102: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides.

Page 103: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

7 Additional Information

The following sections provide additional information about optional preparation, installation, and

post-installation tasks.

There is also a section describing how to delete an SAP system.

Planning

SAP Directories [page 104]

Preparation

■ Performing a Domain Installation Without Being a Domain Administrator [page 107]

■ Installation of Multiple Components in One Database [page 110]

■ MCOD Tablespaces and Directories [page 111]

■ Integration of LDAP Directory Services [page 112]

■ Dialog Instance Installation for an Upgraded System: Updating Instance Profiles [page 116]

Installation

■ Installing the Host Agent Separately [page 117]

■ Creating Tablespaces Manually [page 119]

■ Adding Database Partitions to a Database Instance [page 120]

■ Installing a Near-Line Storage Database for an SAP NetWeaver BW [page 122].

Post-Installation

■ Starting and Stopping the SAP System [page 123]

■ Configuring the Windows Server 2008 (R2) Firewall [page 124].

■ Implementing Single Sign-On with Microsoft Kerberos SSP [page 125]

■ Minimizing the Database Size after the Installation [page 126]

■ Installing Windows Application Servers in a UNIX Environment [page 127]

■ SAP System Security on Windows [page 128]

■ Automatic Creation of Accounts and Groups [page 131]

■ Troubleshooting [page 132]

Deleting an SAP System or SAP Instance

■ Deleting an SAP System [page 133]

7 Additional Information

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 103/196

Page 104: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

7.1 SAP Directories

This section describes the directories that are available in an SAP system.

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

If you want to install a high-availability system, see also Directories in an MSCS Configuration [page 156].End of: HA (MSCS) |

SAPinst automatically creates the following directories during the installation:

■ \usr\sap

This directory is created on the:

● Global host and shared with the network share sapmnt

Only valid for: non-HA |

The global host is the host where the central instance is installed.End of: non-HA |

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

The global host is the host where the ASCS instance is installed.End of: HA (MSCS) |

On global hosts, the \usr\sap directory contains general SAP software, global, and local

(instance-specific) data. For this, SAPinst creates the global directory usr\sap\<SAPSID>

\SYS, which physically exists only once for each SAP system. It consists of the following

subdirectories:

◆ global – contains globally shared data

◆ profile – contains the profiles for all instances

◆ exe – contains executable replication directory for all instances and platforms

● Local host and shared with the name saploc.

On local hosts, the \usr\sap\<SAPSID>\<instance_name> directory contains copies of the

SAP software and local (instance-specific) data.

During the installation of the central instance or dialog instance, and if not yet available SAPinst

also creates the \usr\sap\<DASID>\SYS\global and \usr\sap\<DASID>\<instance_name>

directories for the diagnostics agent on the installation host, if not yet existing.

NOTE

Since SAP traces for the instance are created in \usr\sap, make sure that there is sufficient

space available in this directory. Changes in SAP profiles can also affect the disk space.

NOTE

The executables on the local host are replicated from those on the global host every time

the local instance is started. The SAP copy program sapcpe compares the binaries in the

<platform> directory on the global host and the binaries in the exe directory on the

application server. If the binaries in the exe directory are elder than those in the

<platform> directory, sapcpe replaces them with the newer version of the global host.

7 Additional Information

7.1 SAP Directories

104/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 105: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The sapcpe program also replicates the executables in the \SMDA<instance_number

\exe directory of the diagnostics agent.

Other application servers access the global data using the Universal Naming Convention (UNC)

path \\<SAPGLOBALHOST>\sapmnt. The SAP programs access their instance-specific data with the

UNC path \\<SAPLOCALHOST>\saploc. If the UNC path points to a local directory, the local path

(and not the UNC path) is used to access the directory.

The parameters SAPGLOBALHOST and SAPLOCALHOST have the same values on the global host.

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 (R2):

In a high-availability system, file shares that are pointing to directories on shared disks are

only visible or accessible with the virtual host name of the cluster group the shared disks

belong to.

This lets you have several shares with the same name pointing to different disks (multi-SID).

End of: HA (MSCS) |

■ \usr\sap\trans

The transport directory contains SAP software for the transport of objects between SAP systems.

SAPinst by default creates it on the SAPGLOBALHOST.

If you want to have it created on another host or if you want to use an existing transport host from

your SAP system landscape, you can specify another host during the installation. In this case, you

have to prepare that host for the new SAP system to use it. For more information, see Preparing the

SAP System Transport Host [page 62].

Directory Structure

The following figures show how the physical directory \usr\sap is shared on the global host in a central

and in a distributed system. In both cases, the UNC paths are used as follows:

■ \\<SAPGLOBALHOST>\sapmnt to access global directories

■ \\<SAPLOCALHOST>\saploc to access local instance-specific data

NOTE

There are the following instance names available in an SAP system:

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

Central services instance for ABAP: ASCS<Instance_Number>.End of: HA (MSCS) |

Central instance: DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>

Dialog instance: D<Instance_Number>.

Diagnostics agent instance: J<Instance_Number>

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

Enqueue Replication Server instance: ERS<Instance_Number>End of: HA (MSCS) |

7 Additional Information

7.1 SAP Directories

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 105/196

Page 106: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

Every new installation of an SAP system is Unicode.

Figure 6: Directory Structure on the Global Host in a Central ABAP System

Figure 7: Directory Structure in a Distributed ABAP System

7 Additional Information

7.1 SAP Directories

106/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 107: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Only valid for: HA (MSCS);HA (z/OS) |

Figure 8: Directory Structure in a High-Availability ABAP SystemEnd of: HA (MSCS);HA (z/OS) |

7.2 Performing a Domain Installation Without Being a Domain Administrator

You normally perform a domain installation of the SAP system with a user who is a member of the

domain Admins group, as described in Required User Authorization for Running SAPinst [page 61]. If for any

reason, the account used for the installation is not a member of the domain Admins group, you can

perform the installation with a domain user who is a member of the local Administrators group. In

this case, the domain administrator has to prepare the system appropriately for you. The domain

administrator can perform the following steps either using SAPinst or manually:

1. Create the new global group SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin.

2. Create the two new SAP system users <sapsid>adm and SAPService<SAPSID>.

3. Add the users <sapsid>adm and SAPService<SAPSID> to the newly created group

SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin.

4. Create the database administration group db<dbsid>adm and the database control group

db<dbsid>ctl.

5. Create the new DB2 database administrator db2<dbsid>.

6. Add users <sapsid>adm and SAPService<SAPSID> to the group db<dbsid>ctl. Add the user

db2<dbsid> to the group db<dbsid>adm.

7 Additional Information

7.2 Performing a Domain Installation Without Being a Domain Administrator

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 107/196

Page 108: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

7. If you want the database connect user (sap<sapsid>) to be part of the <sapsid>adm domain, you

have to create the user and its group db<dbsid>mnt manually.

CAUTION

Make sure that you choose the correct value during the dialog phase of SAPinst.

8. Create the database extended security groups DB2ADMNS_<DBSID> and DB2USERS_<DBSID>.

9. Add users db2<dbsid> and SAPService<SAPSID> to the database extended security group

DB2ADMNS_<DBSID>.

Prerequisites

■ You must be domain administrator to perform the required steps.

■ Windows Server 2008 (R2):

You must have installed the feature Remote Server Administration Tools as follows:

1. Choose Start Administrative Tools Server Manager .

2. In the Server Manager windows, select Features.

3. Select the feature Remote Server Administration Tools Role Administration Tools Active Directory

Domain Services Tools .

Procedure

Creating the Required Uses and Groups Using SAPinst

On the host where the SAP system is to be installed, the domain administrator runs SAPinst [page 72],

and chooses Software Life-Cycle Options Additional Preparation Options Operating System and Users to have

the group and users created automatically.

Creating the Required Uses and Groups Manually

Creating the New Global Group SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin

1. Log on as domain administrator.

2. To start the Active Directory Users and Computers Console, choose:

Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Active Directory Users and Computers

NOTE

Windows Server 2003 only: If you cannot find Active Directory Users and Computers, start it as

follows:

1. Choose Start Run and enter mmc.

2. Choose Console Add/Remove Snap-in... Add .

3. Select Active Directory Users and Computers.

4. Choose Add .

5. Choose Close OK

3. Right-click Users in Tree, and choose New Group .

4. Enter the following:

Group name: SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin

7 Additional Information

7.2 Performing a Domain Installation Without Being a Domain Administrator

108/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 109: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

Enter the SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin group exactly as specified in the correct uppercase and

lowercase.

5. Select the following:

1. Group scope: Global

2. Group type: Security

6. Choose OK.

Creating the New SAP System Users <sapsid>adm and SAPService<SAPSID>

1. In Active Directory Users and Computers Console, right-click Users in Tree and choose:

New User

2. Enter the following:

NOTE

Enter the <sapsid>adm and SAPService<SAPSID> user exactly as specified in the correct

uppercase and lowercase.

Field Input for <sapsid>adm Input for SAPService<SAPSID>

First name: None None

Initials: None None

Last name: None None

Full name: <sapsid>adm SAPService<SAPSID>

User logon name: <sapsid>adm SAPService<SAPSID>

Full name: <sapsid>adm SAPSE<SAPSID>

User logon name: <sapsid>adm SAPSE<SAPSID>

3. Choose Next and enter the following:

Password: <password>

Confirm password: <password>

4. Select Password never expires.

NOTE

Make sure that no other options are selected.

5. Choose Next Finish .

Adding the <sapsid>adm User to the SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin Group

1. In the Users folder, double-click the newly created user account <sapsid>adm in the list on the

right.

2. Choose Member Add .

3. Select the new SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin group and choose Add to add it to the list.

NOTE

By default, the user is also a member of the Domain Users group.

4. Choose OK twice.

7 Additional Information

7.2 Performing a Domain Installation Without Being a Domain Administrator

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 109/196

Page 110: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Adding the SAPService<SAPSID> User to the SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin Group

1. In the Users folder, double-click the newly created user account SAPService<SAPSID> in the list on

the right.

2. Choose Member Add .

3. Select the new SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin group.

4. Choose Add to add it to the list, and then OK.

5. Choose OK to close SAPService<SAPSID> Properties.

6. Close the Active Directory Users and Computers Management Console.

7.3 Installation of Multiple Components in One Database

You can install multiple SAP systems in a single database. This is called Multiple Components in One

Database (MCOD). MCOD is available with all SAP components and all the major databases for the

SAP system. No extra effort is required because the MCOD installation is fully integrated into the

standard installation procedure. MCOD is not an additional installation option. Instead, it is an option

of the database instance installation.

With MCOD we distinguish two scenarios:

■ The installation of an SAP system in a new database

■ The installation of an additional SAP system in an existing database (MCOD)

Prerequisites ■ For more information about MCOD and its availability on different platforms, see http://

www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/dbos Key Topics Multiple Components in One Database (MCOD) .

■ We have released MCOD for Unicode installations. A prerequisite is that the MCOD system contains

Unicode instances only. SAP does not support mixed solutions.

■ Improved sizing required

In general, you calculate the CPU usage for an MCOD database by adding up the CPU usage for

each individual SAP system. You can do the same for memory resources and disk space.

You can size multiple components in one database by sizing each individual component using the

Quick Sizer tool and then adding the requirements together. For more information about the

Quick Sizer, see http://service.sap.com/sizing.

Features ■ Reduced administration effort

■ Consistent system landscape for backup, system copy, administration, and recovery

■ Increased security and reduced database failure for multiple SAP systems due to monitoring and

administration of only one database

■ Independent upgrade

In an MCOD landscape, you can upgrade a single component independently from the other

components running in the same database, assuming that the upgraded component runs on the

7 Additional Information

7.3 Installation of Multiple Components in One Database

110/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 111: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

same database version. However, if you need to restore a backup, be aware that all other components

are also affected.

NOTE

Special MCOD considerations and differences from the standard procedure are listed where

relevant in the installation documentation.

Constraints

RECOMMENDATION

We strongly recommend that you test MCOD in a test or development system.

We recommend that you run MCOD systems in the same context. We do not recommend that

you mix test, development, and production systems in the same MCOD.

■ In the event of database failure, all SAP systems running on the single database are affected.

■ Automated support in an MCOD landscape for the following administrative tasks depends on your

operating system and database:

● Copying a single component from an MCOD landscape to another database at database level.

● Uninstalling a single component from an MCOD landscape requires some additional steps.

You can use a remote connection to SAP support to request help with these tasks. For more

information, see http://service.sap.com/remoteconnection.

■ You cannot install a Unicode ABAP system with a non-Unicode ABAP system in one database.

■ Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

MSCS only: You cannot install multiple components in one database with Microsoft Cluster

Service (MSCS). For more information about MSCS, see High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

[page 141].End of: HA (MSCS) |

■ For the first SAP system, the database system ID can be different from the SAP system ID.

■ For the second SAP system, you must use the same DBSID as for the first SAP system.

■ If you decide to turn off database logging during the database load phase of the installation, you

need to plan downtime for all MCOD systems sharing the database.

7.4 MCOD Tablespaces and Directories

If you install additional SAP components into one database, each system has its own tablespaces. Only

SYSCATSPACE and the temporary tablespaces are shared, for example, the additional SAP system

<SAPSID2> uses tablespaces, such as <SAPSID2>#BTABD and <SAPSID2>#BTABI.

NOTE

During an installation of multiple components on one database, additional space is required for

tablespace SYSCATSPACE. If you are not using tablespaces with autoresize mode, you must extend

SYSCATSPACE manually before you start the SAP system installation.

7 Additional Information

7.4 MCOD Tablespaces and Directories

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 111/196

Page 112: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

If you are not using autostorage tablespaces, the tablespaces of the additional SAP system <SAPSID2>

are located in <drive>:\db2\<SAPSID2>\sapdata<n>. If you are using autostorage tablespaces, the

automatic storage paths, which have already been configured in your database, are used.

The temporary tablespace of the additional SAP system <SAPSID2> is the same as for <SAPSID1>. If

temporary tablespaces with 16 KB page size do not exist, they are created in \db2\<DBSID>

\sapdata<n>.

CAUTION

If you are using a database in AutoStorage mode in an MCOD environment, you can choose on

the Sapdata Directories dialog if your tablespaces are also AutoStorage or AutoResize. Otherwise, the radio

button for AutoStorage is disabled and you must select AutoResize.

Each additional system works with its own SAP connect user sap<sapsid>. This means that all database

objects of SAP system <SAPSID2> are owned by sap<sapsid2>.

There is only one database administrator db2<dbsid>. The following table provides information on the

required directories for an additional SAP system.

Required Directories

Directories Description

■ With DB2's automatic storage management:Use the automatic storage paths that have already been configured in your database.

■ No automatic storage management:<drive>:\db2\<SAPSID2>\sapdata<n>

SAP data for container type database-managed space (DMS) FILEBy default, four sapdata directories are created (sapdata1, sapdata2, sapdata3, sapdata4).

<drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID2> Directory containing software for the additional SAP component

<drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\sapdata<n> Contains the temporary tablespaces.

7.5 Integration of LDAP Directory Services

This section explains the benefits of using the SAP system with the Lightweight Directory Access

Protocol (LDAP) directory and gives an overview of the configuration steps required to use an SAP

system with the directory.

LDAP defines a standard protocol for accessing directory services, which is supported by various

directory products such as Microsoft Active Directory, and OpenLDAP slapd. Using directory services

enables important information in a corporate network to be stored centrally on a server. The advantage

of storing information centrally for the entire network is that you only have to maintain data once,

which avoids redundancy and inconsistency.

If an LDAP directory is available in your corporate network, you can configure the SAP system to use

this feature. For example, a correctly configured SAP system can read information from the directory

and also store information there.

7 Additional Information

7.5 Integration of LDAP Directory Services

112/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 113: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

The SAP system can interact with the Active Directory using the LDAP protocol, which defines:

■ The communication protocol between the SAP system and the directory

■ How data in the directory is structured, accessed, or modified

If a directory other than the Active Directory also supports the LDAP protocol, the SAP system

can take advantage of the information stored there. For example, if there is an LDAP directory on

a UNIX or Windows server, you can configure the SAP system to use the information available

there. In the following text, directories other than the Active Directory that implement the LDAP

protocol are called generic LDAP directories.

CAUTION

This section does not provide information about the use of LDAP directories with the LDAP

Connector. For more information about using and configuring the LDAP Connector for an ABAP

system, see the SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Identity Management User and

Role Administration of AS ABAP Configuration of User and Role Administration Directory Services LDAP

Connector

Prerequisites

You can only configure the SAP system for Active Directory services or other LDAP directories if these

are already available on the network. As of Windows 2000 or higher, the Active Directory is

automatically available on all domain controllers. A generic LDAP directory is an additional component

that you must install separately on a UNIX or Windows server.

Features

In the SAP environment, you can exploit the information stored in an Active Directory or generic

LDAP directory by using:

■ SAP Logon

■ The SAP Microsoft Management Console (SAP MMC)

For more information about the automatic registration of SAP components in LDAP directories and

the benefits of using it in SAP Logon and SAP MMC, see the documentation SAP System Information in

Directory Services at:

http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/scn/go/portal/prtroot/docs/library/uuid/ d0a0d051-

eae2-2b10-e1ac-f3a7f6494c53

SAP Logon

Instead of using a fixed list of systems and message servers, you can configure the SAP Logon in the

sapmsg.ini configuration file to find SAP systems and their message servers from the directory. If you

7 Additional Information

7.5 Integration of LDAP Directory Services

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 113/196

Page 114: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

configure SAP logon to use the LDAP directory, it queries the directory each time Server or Group selection

is chosen to fetch up-to-date information on available SAP systems.

To use LDAP operation mode, make sure that the sapmsg.ini file contains the following:

[Address]

Mode=LDAPdirectory

LDAPserver=

LDAPnode=

LDAPoptions=

Distinguish the following cases:

■ If you use an Active Directory, you must set LDAPoptions=“DirType=NT5ADS”. For more

information, see the SAP system profile parameter ldap/options.

■ You must specify the directory servers (for example, LDAPserver=pcintel6 p24709) if either of

the following is true:

● The client is not located in the same domain forest as the Active Directory

● The operating system does not have a directory service client (Windows NT and Windows 9X

without installed dsclient).

For more information, see the SAP system profile parameter ldap/servers.

■ For other directory services, you can use LDAPnode to specify the distinguished name of the SAP

root node. For more information, see the SAP system profile parameter ldap/saproot.

SAP MMC

The SAP MMC is a graphical user interface (GUI) for administering and monitoring SAP systems from

a central location. It is automatically set up when you install an SAP system on Windows. If the SAP

system has been prepared correctly, the SAP MMC presents and analyzes system information that it

gathers from various sources, including the Active Directory.

Integrating the Active Directory as a source of information has advantages for the SAP MMC. It can

read system information straight from the directory that automatically registers changes to the system

landscape. As a result, up-to-date information about all SAP application servers, their status, and

parameter settings is always available in the SAP MMC.

If you need to administer distributed systems, we especially recommend that you use the SAP MMC

together with Active Directory services. You can keep track of significant events in all of the systems

from a single SAP MMC interface. You do not need to manually register changes in the system

configuration. Instead, such changes are automatically updated in the directory and subsequently

reflected in the SAP MMC.

If your SAP system is part of a heterogeneous SAP system landscape that comprises systems or instances

both on UNIX and Windows operating systems, you can also use the SAP MMC for operating and

monitoring the instances running on UNIX.

7 Additional Information

7.5 Integration of LDAP Directory Services

114/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 115: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

You can also use the SAP Management Console (SAP MC) for administering and monitoring SAP

systems from a central location. For more information about the SAP MC and about how to

configure it to access LDAP directories, see the documentation SAP Management Console at:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability Java

Technology Administration Manual J2EE Engine J2EE Engine Administration Tools SAP Management

Console

Configuration Tasks for LDAP Directories

This section describes the configuration tasks you have to perform for the Active Directory or other

(generic) LDAP directories.

Configuration Tasks for Active Directory

To enable an SAP system to use the features offered by the Active Directory, you must configure the

Active Directory so that it can store SAP system data.

To prepare the directory, you use SAPinst to automatically:

■ Extend the Active Directory schema to include the SAP-specific data types

■ Create the domain accounts required to enable the SAP system to access and modify the Active

Directory. These are the group SAP_LDAP and the user sapldap.

■ Create the root container where information related to SAP is stored

■ Control access to the container for SAP data by giving members of the SAP_LDAP group permission

to read and write to the directory

You do this by running SAPinst and choosing <Your SAP product> Software Life-Cycle Options LDAP

Registration Active Directory Configuration .

NOTE

You have to perform the directory server configuration only once. Then all SAP systems that

need to register in this directory server can use this setup.

Configuration Tasks for Generic LDAP Directories

To configure other LDAP directories, refer to the documentation of your directory vendor. The SAPinst

Installation Master DVD contains schema extensions for directory servers Netscape/iPlanet

(ldregns4.txt) and OpenLDAP slapd (ldregslapd.schema). Both files are located in the directory

\DATA_UNITS\IM_<platform>\COMMON\ADS. After you have applied the schema extension, you need to

create a root container to store the SAP-related information and create a directory user that the SAP

application server can use to write information to the directory.

For more information about how to set up a Netscape/iPlanet directory server, see the documentation

SAP System Information in Directory Services at: http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/scn/go/portal/prtroot/

docs/library/uuid/ d0a0d051-eae2-2b10-e1ac-f3a7f6494c53

7 Additional Information

7.5 Integration of LDAP Directory Services

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 115/196

Page 116: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Enabling the SAP System LDAP Registration

Once you have correctly configured your directory server, you can enable the LDAP registration of the

SAP system by setting some profile parameters in the default profile.

To do this, run SAPinst once for your system and choose <Your SAP product> Software Life-Cycle Options

LDAP Registration LDAP Support

If you use a directory server other than Microsoft Active Directory and/or non-Windows application

servers, you have to store the directory user and password information by using ldappasswd

pf=<any_instance_profile>. The information is encrypted for storage in DIR_GLOBAL and is therefore

valid for all application servers. After restarting all application servers and start services, the system is

registered in your directory server. The registration protocols of the components are dev_ldap*. The

registration is updated every time a component starts.

7.6 Dialog Instance Installation for an Upgraded System only: Updating Profiles

You only need to perform the Procedure further below if you want to install a dialog instance and you

have already performed the following steps:

1. You upgraded your SAP system from an earlier source release to a target release lower than SAP

ERP 6.0 SR3.

2. You installed the current Enhancement Package with the SAP Enhancement Package Installer.

Procedure1. On the SAP Global host, go to folder /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/profile.

NOTE

SAP system profiles are named as follows:

Instance profiles: <SAPSID>_<INSTANCE_ID>_<hostname>.pfl

Start profiles: START_<INSTANCE_ID>_<hostname>.pfl

2. Make sure that the parameter DIR_CT_RUN, if set, has identical values in the instance profile and

the start profile of the central instance:

■ If it is set in the instance profile, it must also be set in the start profile.

■ If it is not set in the instance profile, it must not be set in the start profile either.

3. Edit the default profile DEFAULT.PFL by setting rdisp/msserv_internal to a free port number.

EXAMPLE

DEFAULT.PFL

Before the change:

...

rdisp/msserv = sapms<SAPSID>

...

After the change:

7 Additional Information

7.6 Dialog Instance Installation for an Upgraded System only: Updating Profiles

116/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 117: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

...

rdisp/msserv = sapms<SAPSID>

rdisp/msserv_internal = <free port number>

...

4. Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

In a high-availability system, edit the instance profile of the central services instance for ABAP

(ASCS) and do the following:End of: HA (MSCS) |

■ Set rdisp/msserv to 0.

■ Set rdisp/msserv_internal to the port number assigned to rdisp/msserv.

EXAMPLE

Instance profile of the central services instance:

Before the change:

...

rdisp/msserv = 4711

...

After the change:

...

rdisp/msserv = 0

rdisp/msserv_internal = 4711

...

5. Restart all SAP services and instances of your SAP system.

7.7 Installing the Host Agent Separately

This procedure tells you how to install a host agent separately.

The host agent is automatically installed during the installation of all new SAP system instances based

on SAP NetWeaver 7.1 or higher. You only need to install a host agent separately in the following

cases:

■ You want to manage a host that does not have an SAP instance or component.

■ You have upgraded your SAP system to SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP2 or higher and want the instances

of the upgraded system to be managed by the ACC.

7 Additional Information

7.7 Installing the Host Agent Separately

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 117/196

Page 118: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 9: Host Agent

The host agent contains the following elements:

■ The control program saphostexec

■ The SAP NetWeaver Management agent SAPHostControl (sapstartsrv in host mode)

■ The sapacosprep executable of the Adaptive Computing Infrastructure

■ The operating system collector saposcol

NOTE

The installed programs are automatically started when the host is booted.

On Microsoft Windows hosts, the services SAPHostControl and SAPHostExec automatically start

the installed programs.

Procedure

You have to perform the following steps on the host where you install the host agent separately:

1. You check hardware and software requirements [page 22].

2. You perform basic preparations on Windows [page 58].

3. You check that you have the required user authorization for running SAPinst [page 61].

4. Insert the Installation Master DVD into your DVD drive or mount it locally.

For more information, see Preparing the Installation Media [page 65].

5. You start SAPinst [page 72] to install the host agent.

On the Welcome screen, choose Software Life-Cycle Options Additional Preparation Options Host

Agent .

6. You perform the following post-installation steps:

1. Check whether the installed services are available as follows:

7 Additional Information

7.7 Installing the Host Agent Separately

118/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 119: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

1. Log on as user sapadm.

2. Check whether the following services are available:

■ The control program saphostexec

■ The SAP NetWeaver Management agent SAPHostControl (sapstartsrv in host

mode)

NOTE

When the host is booted, the services SAPHostControl and SAPHostExec

automatically start the installed programs

2. You configure the monitoring architecture with the installed host agent as described in the

SAP Library at:

http://help.sap.com SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life

Cycle Management by Key Capability Solution Monitoring Monitoring in the CCMS Infrastructure of the

NetWeaver Management Agents

7.8 Creating Tablespaces Manually (Optional)

If the tablespace layout used by SAPinst does not meet your requirements, you can optionally create

your tablespaces manually. During the dialog phase of SAPinst, you can specify if you want to use

tablespaces managed by DB2's automatic storage management and if you want SAPinst to create your

tablespaces.

Procedure

CAUTION

SAPinst does not check the page size of tablespaces that have either been created manually or are

already existing. If you create the tablespaces manually, you must use a page size of 16 KB.

1. On the dialog IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Sapdata Directories , you must deselect the

option Create Tablespaces with SAPinst.

NOTE

In a typical installation, this dialog does not appear. To get to this dialog, select this parameter

on the Parameter Summary screen and choose Revise.

2. Continue to enter all the required parameters and start SAPinst.

During the installation phase, the following message box appears:

You must create the tablespaces now. To do so, use the createTablespaces.sql script that is located in your installation

directory.

To continue the installation, choose OK. Alternatively, you can cancel SAPinst here and restart it again.

7 Additional Information

7.8 Creating Tablespaces Manually (Optional)

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 119/196

Page 120: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. Go to your installation directory and search for script createTablespace.sql. This file content

depends on your selection during the dialog phase and the file contains the same commands for

the creation of tablespaces that SAPinst uses.

NOTE

You must create all the tablespaces that are listed in the script.

4. Modify the CREATE statements according to your requirements.

5. To execute the script, enter the following command:

db2 —tvf <script_name>

6. When you have finished, continue with the installation by choosing OK on the message box.

More Information

■ DB2 Tablespaces [page 50]

■ Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Production Systems [page 53]

7.9 Adding Database Partitions to a Database Instance

Adding database partitions in a database instance means that you can distribute the following tablespaces

across multiple database partitions:

■ <SAPSID>#ODSD

■ <SAPSID>#ODSI

■ <SAPSID>#FACTD

■ <SAPSID>#FACTI

NOTE

These tablespaces are used for BW reporting only. Therefore, only consider installing on a

distributed database server if you plan to extensively use the BW reporting with large volumes of

data in BW InfoCubes.

Prerequisites

RECOMMENDATION

We strongly recommend that you involve a consultant with multi partition skills in the whole

process of planning and installing a multi partition SAP system on a DB2 database.

■ Make sure that you have installed the correct Windows version as described in Hardware and Software

Requirements [page 22] on all database servers.

■ You have successfully installed an SAP database instance.

NOTE

In an MCOD environment, you are able to use tablespaces without AutoStorage and a database

with AutoStorage.

7 Additional Information

7.9 Adding Database Partitions to a Database Instance

120/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 121: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ The multipartition database manager instance DB2<DBSID> for SAP NW BW DB2 is only created

on database server 1.

■ Each participating database server has to be enabled as Trusted for delegation.

■ User <domain>\db2<dbsid> has to be enabled as Trusted for delegation.

■ On each database server, change the logon account of service DB2 Remote Command Service to user

<domain>\db2<dbsid>.

■ Check if your database is enabled for automatic storage management:

● If the database is enabled for automatic storage management, make sure that the automatic

storage paths exist on the host where you want to add a new database partition. In addition,

make sure that the user db2<dbsid> can access these automatic storage paths.

● If the database is not enabled for automatic storage management, no further action is required.

Procedure

1. Stop the SAP system and the SAP database instance.

2. To add database partitions on a database server, proceed as follows:

1. Log on with the same user who installed DB2 on the instance-owning database partition server.

2. Make sure that you have the same system time on each participating computer as on the

instance-owning database partition server.

3. You can perform the following steps either before you start SAPinst or during an exit step of

SAPinst:

For the first database partition that you want to install on a remote database server <n>, you

have to perform the following steps:

1. Add user <Domain>\db2<dbsid> to the local administrators group of the remote host.

2. On the remote host, change the logon account of service DB2 Remote Command Service to

user <domain>\db2<dbsid>

3. Log on to the instance-owning database partition server (database server 1) with the same

user who installed DB2.

4. Open a DB2 command window and enter the following command:

db2start dbpartitionnum <new_partition_number> add dbpartitionnum hostname

<hostname>

port 0 computer <host_name> user <domain>\db2<dbsid> password <password>

without tablespaces

Explanation of Variables

Variables Description

<new_partition_number> Partition number of new partition. If you have four partitions 0, 1, 2, 3, the new partition is 4.

<domain> Windows domain

<host_name> Name of the remote database partition server on which the new partition is to be created

7 Additional Information

7.9 Adding Database Partitions to a Database Instance

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 121/196

Page 122: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Variables Description

<password> Password of user db2<dbsid>

5. Stop and restart the database manager using db2stop and db2start.

6. Check and make sure that the local user sap<sapsid> does not exist on the remote

database server<n>.

4. Mount the following directory on every additional database server:

■ For Unicode SAP systems:

\\<central_instance_host>\sapmnt\<sapsid>\sys\exe\uc\<Windows_platform>

■ For Non-Unicode SAP systems:

\\<central_instance_host>\sapmnt\<sapsid>\sys\exe\nuc\<Windows_platform>

5. Start SAPinst.

6. On the Welcome screen, choose <SAP system> Software Lifecycle Options Database Tools IBM

DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Additional Database Partitions .

7. To continue choose Next and follow the instructions on the SAPinst dialogs.

NOTE

Choose the same communication ports on all database servers.

3. Add the new partitions to the existing database partition groups by using the BW Data Distribution

wizard in the DBA Cockpit:

1. In the SAP system, call transaction DBACOCKPIT and choose Wizards BW

Administration .

2. Follow the instructions on the screens.

7.10 Installing a Near-Line Storage Database for an SAP NetWeaver BW System

CAUTION

The following section only applies if you have installed an SAP NetWeaver BW system.

You install a near-line database if you want to use a DB2 remote database as repository to store BW data

that is not frequently used.

Prerequisites

You have successfully installed an SAP NetWeaver BW system.

Procedure

1. Log on to the host where you want to install the DB2 remote database using an account with the

required user authorization to run SAPinst [page 61].

2. Start SAPinst [page 72].

7 Additional Information

7.10 Installing a Near-Line Storage Database for an SAP NetWeaver BW System

122/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 123: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. On the Welcome screen, choose <SAP System> Software Life-Cycle Options Database Tools IBM DB2

for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Install Near-Line Storage .

4. To continue choose Next and follow the instructions on the SAPinst dialogs.

NOTE

Make sure that during the dialog phase of SAPinst you take note of the following information:

■ Name of server where you installed the DB2 remote database

■ Communication port

■ Name of database

This information is required when you want to configure the access to the remote database

from your SAP NetWeaver BW system as described in the separate document Enabling an SAP

NetWeaver BW to use DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows as Near-Line Storage.

5. To create a near-line storage connection that uses the newly created database as repository for the

stored BW data, perform the steps described in the appropriate section of the separate document

Enabling an SAP NetWeaver BW to Use DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows as Near-Line Storage.

More Information

Enabling an SAP NetWeaver BW to Use DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows as Near-Line Storage on SAP Service

Marketplace at:

http://service.sap.com/installnw70 Installation of SAP NetWeaver Systems

7.11 Starting and Stopping the SAP System

You use this procedure to check that you can start and stop the SAP system after the installation with

the SAP Microsoft Management Console (SAP MMC).

With a newly installed SAP MMC, you can start or stop installed SAP instances locally on the host that

you are logged on to. You can also start and stop the diagnostics agent with the SAP MMC. If the SAP

MMC is configured for central system administration, you can start or stop the entire system from a

single host.

NOTE

For more information about the SAP MMC, see:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key

Capability Solution Monitoring Monitoring in the CCMS SAP Microsoft Management Console: Windows

Prerequisites

Windows Server 2008 (R2): The user who wants to start and stop the SAP system with the SAP MMC,

must be a member of the local administrators group.

7 Additional Information

7.11 Starting and Stopping the SAP System

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 123/196

Page 124: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure1. Start the SAP MMC on the SAP system host by choosing Start All Programs SAP Management

Console .

2. Right-click the SAP system node and choose Start or Stop.

All instances listed under the system node start or stop in the correct order.

3. If the SAP system is installed on multiple hosts (distributed or high-availability system), you have

the following options to start or stop your system:

■ You start or stop the SAP instances using the SAP MMC on each host.

■ You add the remote instances to the SAP MMC configuration to start or stop all instances

from a single SAP MMC.

To do so, do one of the following:

● You configure the SAP MMC manually. For more information, see Changing the Configuration

of the SAP MMC in the SAP MMC documentation.

● You use the automatic LDAP registration. For more information, see Configuring SAP MMC

for Active Directory Services in the SAP MMC documentation.

NOTE

You can also start and stop a UNIX system with the SAP MMC.

7.12 Configuring the Windows Server 2008 Firewall

The Windows Server 2008 (R2) firewall is configured to allow only a small set of Windows-specific

inbound IP connections.

Therefore, SAP recommends that you do not turn on the Windows firewall after you have installed

your SAP system. Instead, we recommend that you secure network access to your SAP system with the

physical firewall or a router Access Control List (ACL) within your datacenter.

If, for some reason, you want to use the Windows Server firewall, you have to configure the Windows

firewall and define a set of Inbound Rules for the TCP/IP port numbers that are used by your system.

Otherwise, your SAP system might not operate.

For more information about the port numbers used, see the documentation TCP/IP Ports Used by SAP

Applications at:

http://service.sap.com/security Security in Detail Infrastructure Security

Ports listed with the default value Not active in this document are not configured.

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

CAUTION

In a high-availability system, you have to configure the firewall on all MSCS nodes.

End of: HA (MSCS) |

PrerequisitesYou turn on the disabled firewall [page 58] as follows:

7 Additional Information

7.12 Configuring the Windows Server 2008 Firewall

124/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 125: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

1. Choose Start Administrative Tools Windows Firewall with Advanced Security .

2. Right-click Windows Firewall with Advanced Security and choose Properties.

3. Set the Firewall state to On.

Procedure

This procedure describes how to set Inbound Rules for the ports of an installed ABAP server that was

installed with instance number 00.

1. Choose Start Administrative Tools Windows Firewall with Advanced Security .

2. Right-click Inbound Rules and choose New Rule.

The New Inbound Rule Wizard starts.

3. For Rule Type, select Port and choose Next.

4. For Protocol and Ports, select port type TCP or UDP depending on the port type used.

Select Specific local ports, and enter the port numbers for which you want to apply the new rule, for

example:

3200,3300,4800,8000,3600,50013,50000

Note that the final two digits of the port number correspond to the instance number.

5. Choose Next.

6. For Action, select Allow the connection, and choose Next.

7. For Profile, keep Domain, Private and Public selected, and choose Next.

For more information, see the link Learn more about profiles on this screen.

8. Enter the Name, for example SAP ABAP Server 00, and Description for the new rule.

9. Choose Next.

10. Choose Finish to save the rule.

The new inbound rule appears in the Inbound Rules list. To modify the settings, right-click on the

rule and choose Properties.

NOTE

If you want to use, for example, a different IP scope for port 50013, which is used by the connection

SAP Start Service – SAP Management Console, you can restrict the IP access to a small number

of SAP administrators. Then delete this port from the SAP ABAP Server 00 rule and create a new

rule for port 50013 with a more restrictive scope.

7.13 Implementing Single Sign-On with Microsoft Kerberos SSP for Your SAP System

Kerberos Single Sign-On (SSO) is a secure method of logging on to the SAP system that simplifies the

logon procedure.

When your system is configured for SSO, an authorized user who has logged on to Windows can access

the SAP system simply by selecting it in the SAP logon window or clicking the shortcut. There is no

7 Additional Information

7.13 Implementing Single Sign-On with Microsoft Kerberos SSP for Your SAP System

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 125/196

Page 126: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

need to enter the SAP system user name and password when you log on to your SAP system with SAP

GUI. SSO makes it significantly easier for you to manage SAP system users. The Microsoft Kerberos

Security Service Provider (SSP) provides secure authentication plus encryption of the network

communication.

Procedure

For more information about implementing Kerberos SSO for your SAP system, see:

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English SAP

NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Secure

Network Communications (SNC) Configuring the Communication Partners to Use SNC Special Cases

7.14 Minimizing the Database Size after the Installation

If you installed your SAP system without selecting the options Use DB2's Row Compression and Use Deferred

Table Creation, you can still activate both functions at a later point in time using the DBA Cockpit.

Procedure

Activating DB2s Row Compression

NOTE

The following steps apply if your database level is at least DB2 V9.5 and if the database collection

framework has been set up correctly as described in the separate document Database Administration

Using the DBA Cockpit: IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

1. In your SAP system, call transaction DBACOCKPIT and choose Space Tables and Indexes

Compression Status on the Database tab page of the DBA Cockpit.

2. Run a compression check on the Compression Status screen by choosing the Start Compression Check

pushbutton.

3. On the Schedule Compression Check dialog box, specify if you want the job to start immediately or at a

certain day and time and confirm your entries.

A job is scheduled in the DB2 administrative task scheduler.

4. Once the job has finished, go to the Compression Candidates tab page and select all tables that you want

to compress and choose the Compress pushbutton.

For more information, see section Tables and Indexes: Compression Status in the separate document Database

Administration Using the DBA Cockpit: IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows.

Activating Deferred Table Creation

CAUTION

Before you use this function, make sure that you read SAP Note 1151343.

The following tables are excluded from the conversion to virtual tables:

7 Additional Information

7.14 Minimizing the Database Size after the Installation

126/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 127: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ Volatile tables

■ MDC tables

■ Partitioned tables

1. In your SAP system, call transaction DBACOCKPIT and choose Space Tables and Indexes Virtual

Tables on the Database tab page of the DBA Cockpit.

2. On the Virtual Tables screen, choose the Candidates for Virtualization tab page. A list of tables that are

candidates for being dropped and re-created as virtual tables is displayed.

3. Choose the Convert Empty Tables pushbutton.

A job is scheduled that checks a background job is scheduled that checks each table if it is:

■ Empty

■ Not volatile

■ Does not have a partitioning key

■ Not using MDC tables tables

Tables that meet these conditions are dropped and re-created as virtual tables.

NOTE

To materialize tables again, that is, to create the empty tables that have not yet been created after

the installation, select one or more tables from the list on the Virtual Tables tab page and choose

the Materialize pushbutton.

More Information

Database Administration Using the DBA Cockpit: IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows at:

https://service.sap.com/instguidesnw SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Operations Database-Specific

Guides

7.15 Installing Windows Application Servers in a UNIX Environment

You use the following procedure if you want to install the central instance and the database server on

a UNIX server and application servers in a Windows environment.

Procedure

To install a central instance and a database server on UNIX, proceed as follows:

1. Check the installation prerequisites in the installation documentation for UNIX.

2. Plan the installation and prepare your operating system.

3. Install the database software and use SAPinst to install the central instance and the database server.

4. Check and complete the installation.

5. Create the UNIX user SAPService<SAPSID> as user root with sapsys as primary group and

sysctrl as additional group using smitty or enter the following command:

7 Additional Information

7.15 Installing Windows Application Servers in a UNIX Environment

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 127/196

Page 128: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

mkuser pgrp='sapsys' groups='sapsys, sysctrl' SAPService<SAPSID>

6. Set the password for user SAPService<SAPSID>.

On Windows, install a dialog instance as described in SAP Note 680617).

NOTE

1. During the installation of the dialog instance, specify the port numbers for the database

connection and the password of the user db2<dbsid>. The port numbers must be the same

as on the database server. Make sure that the directories DIR_TRANS, DIR_GLOBAL, and

DIR_PROFILE are accessible for the users SAPService<SAPSID>, <sapsid>adm, and the connect

user, for which sap<sapsid> is the default (you can change the connect user during the

installation).

2. Specify in the registry keys Connection<n> for the network connection in

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE SAP <SAPSID> NetConnection

sapse<sapsid> as user

7.16 SAP System Security on Windows

In a standard SAP system installation, SAPinst automatically performs all steps relevant for security.

Although SAPinst makes sure that the system is protected against unauthorized access, you must still

check that no security breaches can occur.

For central and straightforward administration of the SAP system, you have to install distributed SAP

systems with multiple application servers (central or dialog instances) in a Windows domain. This

section describes the user accounts and groups that SAPinst creates during a domain installation and

shows how these are related to the SAP directories.

User Accounts

SAPinst creates the following accounts for SAP system administration:

■ <sapsid>adm

This is the SAP system administrator account that enables interactive administration of the system.

■ SAPService<SAPSID>

This is the user account that is required to start the SAP system. It has the local user right to log

on as a service.

The advantage of the additional SAPService<SAPSID> account is that it does not allow interactive

logon, which prevents abuse of the account. Therefore, you do not need to set an expiration date

for the password and you do not have to set the option user must change password at next logon.

■ sapadm

This is the user for the SAP host agent. By default it is a local user and not a member of the local

Administrators group. You can change this user into a domain user on the parameter summary

screen. For security reasons, however, SAP strongly recommends to create this user as a local user.

7 Additional Information

7.16 SAP System Security on Windows

128/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 129: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The host agent contains all of the required elements for centrally monitoring any host with the

Alert Monitor or the SAP NetWeaver Administrator.

■ <dasid>adm

This is the diagnostics agent administrator user account that is required for the administration of

the diagnostic agent. By default it is a local user and not a member of the local Administrators

group. You can change this user into a domain user on the parameter summary screen. For security

reasons, however, SAP strongly recommends to create this user as a local user.

■ SAPService<DASID>

This is the user account that is required to start the diagnostic agent. It has the local user right to

log on as a service.

Groups

The only function of a domain group is to group users at the domain level so that they can be placed

in the appropriate local groups.

Only local groups are created and maintained on each local host. A local group can only be given

permissions and rights to the system where it is located. The system is part of a particular domain, and

the local group can contain users and domain (global) groups from this domain.

SAPinst creates the following domain and local groups during a domain installation:

■ SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin

This domain (global) group is a domain-level SAP administration group for organizing SAP system

administrators.

■ SAP_<DASID>_GlobalAdmin

This domain group for the diagnostic agent is only created if you create the diagnostic agent user

<dasid>adm as a domain user.

■ SAP_SAP_GlobalAdmin

This domain group for the host agent is only created if you create the host agent user sapadm as a

domain user.

■ SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin

This local group is created on each host.

■ SAP_<DASID>_LocalAdmin

If you create the diagnostic agent user as domain user, the group SAP_<DASID>_LocalAdmin is also

created.

■ SAP_SAP_LocalAdmin

If you create the host agent user as domain user, the group SAP_SAP_LocalAdmin is also created.

■ SAP_LocalAdmin

This local group is created on all hosts, but is particularly important for the transport host.

Members of the group have full control over the transport directory (\usr\sap\trans) that allows

transports to take place between systems.

7 Additional Information

7.16 SAP System Security on Windows

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 129/196

Page 130: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin groups of all the SAP systems that are part of the transport

infrastructure are added to the SAP_LocalAdmin group. Therefore, the users <sapsid>adm and

SAPService<SAPSID> of all systems in the transport infrastructure are members of the

SAP_LocalAdmin group and have the required authorizations necessary to initiate and execute

transports.

SAP Directories

SAPinst protects the SAP directories under \usr\sap\<SAPSID> by only granting the group

SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin full control over these directories.

The following figure illustrates the users and groups that are created by SAPinst for the <sapsid>adm

and SAPService<SAPSID> users in a system infrastructure consisting of two SAP systems.

Figure 10: User Groups and Accounts

NOTE

An access control list (ACL) controls access to SAP system objects. For maximum security in the

SAP system, only the following are members of all SAP system object ACLs:

■ Local group SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin

■ Group Administrators

■ Account SYSTEM

More Information

Automatic Creation of Accounts and Groups [page 131]

7 Additional Information

7.16 SAP System Security on Windows

130/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 131: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

7.17 Automatic Creation of Accounts and Groups

SAPinst automatically creates the accounts and groups required for the secure operation of the SAP

system with Windows during the installation, as described in SAP System Security on Windows [page 128].

Features

The following figures show the steps that SAPinst performs to create the users and groups and assign

the required rights to SAP directories.

The first figure shows the users that are created during a domain installation, with the diagnostic agent

and host agent operating system users being local users.

Figure 11: Creating Users and Groups

7 Additional Information

7.17 Automatic Creation of Accounts and Groups

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 131/196

Page 132: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 12: Assigning Rights to SAP Directories

7.18 Troubleshooting

The following sections describe the steps that you need to perform manually if SAPinst fails:

■ Troubleshooting with SAPinst [page 132]

7.18.1 Troubleshooting with SAPinst

This section tells you how to proceed when errors occur during the installation with SAPinst.

If an error occurs, SAPinst:

■ Stops the installation.

■ Displays a dialog informing you about the error.

Procedure

1. To view the log file, choose View Logs.

2. If an error occurs during the Define Parameters or Execute phase, do either of the following:

■ Try to solve the problem

■ Stop the installation by choosing Cancel in the SAPinst menu.

For more information, see Interrupted Installation with SAPinst [page 78].

■ After resolving the problem, you can continue the installation by choosing Retry.

7 Additional Information

7.18 Troubleshooting

132/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 133: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. Check the log and trace files of the GUI server and SAPinst GUI in the directory %userprofile%

\.sdtgui\ for errors.

■ If the SAPinst GUI does not start, check the file sdtstart.err in the current %userprofile

% directory.

■ Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

If you use Failover Cluster Server 2008 and experience network connection problems, check

IPv4 host name resolution as described in SAP Note 1365796.End of: HA (MSCS) |

4. If you cannot resolve the problem, create a customer message using component BC-INS.

7.19 Deleting an SAP System or Single Instances

This section describes how to delete a complete SAP system or single SAP instances with the Uninstall

option of SAPinst.

Note the following when deleting an SAP system:

■ When you uninstall an SAP system, the database content is also deleted.

■ You cannot delete an SAP system remotely.

■ SAPinst deletes the database instance and optionally the database software.

■ During the uninstall process, all file systems and subdirectories of the selected SAP system or single

instance are deleted. Before you start uninstalling, make sure that you have saved a copy of all files

and directories that you want to keep in a secure location.

■ The uninstall process is designed to remove as much as possible of the SAP system to be deleted. If

an item cannot be removed, a message informs you that you have to remove this item manually.

You can do this either at once or after the uninstall process has finished. As soon as you confirm

the message, the uninstall process continues.

Prerequisites

■ You have installed your SAP system with standard SAP tools according to the installation

documentation.

■ You are logged on with a user account that has the required authorization to run the SAPinst tool

and the SAP system. For more information, see Required User Authorization for Running SAPinst [page

61].

CAUTION

Do not use the user <sapsid>adm to delete the SAP system.

■ Make sure that the SAP system, or single instance, or standalone engine, or optional standalone

unit to be deleted is down and that you are not logged on as one of the SAP system users. If there

is a lock on one of the SAP system objects, this breaks the uninstall. Make also sure that all SAP-

related processes are stopped.

7 Additional Information

7.19 Deleting an SAP System or Single Instances

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 133/196

Page 134: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

You do not have to stop the host agent. The host agent is stopped automatically during the

uninstall process.

■ Make sure that there are no open sessions by one of the SAP system users when starting the uninstall.

Procedure

1. Start SAPinst as described in Running SAPinst [page 72].

2. On the Welcome screen, choose:

<Your SAP product> Software Life-Cycle Options Uninstall Uninstall System / Standalone Engine / Optional

Standalone Unit

3. Follow the instructions in the SAPinst input dialogs to delete a complete SAP system or single

instances.

NOTE

For more information about the input parameters, place the cursor on the relevant field and

press F1 in SAPinst.

The following table provides information about deleting a complete system or single instances

with SAPinst.

Deletion of Remarks

Central system You can delete a central system (where all instances reside on the same host), in one SAPinst run.

Distributed or high-availability system

If you want to delete a distributed or high-availability system, you have to run SAPinst to delete the required instances locally on each of the hosts belonging to the SAP system in the following sequence:1. Dialog instances, if there are any2. Central instance

If SAPinst stops responding while trying to delete the central instance, do the following:1. Close SAPinst with Cancel and Exit.2. Log off and log on again.3. To finish uninstalling the central instance, restart SAPinst.

3. Database instanceSince SAPinst only stops local instances automatically, make sure that before deleting the database instance of a distributed system, you stop all remaining instances. You must stop the instance with the message server only after having entered all SAPinst parameters for the deletion of the database instance.To delete the database instance or one or more database schemas, choose one of the following options: ■ Drop database

Select this option if you want to drop the database. ■ Select the database schema that you want to delete

Select this option in one of the following situations:

7 Additional Information

7.19 Deleting an SAP System or Single Instances

134/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 135: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Deletion of Remarks

● You are running multiple components on one database (MCOD) and you only want to delete the database schema of the corresponding component to be deleted

● You want to delete the Java part of an ABAP+Java system.

NOTE

If you want to delete a schema in an MCOD environment using SAPinst, no DB2–specific directories are deleted. Make sure that you manually delete\db2\<sapsid>\sapdata<1–n>.

4. Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

Enqueue Replication ServerEnd of: HA (MSCS) |

5. Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

Central services instance for ABAP (ASCS)End of: HA (MSCS) |

CAUTION

If you are running multiple components on one database (MCOD), do not delete the database.

Dialog instance If you want to delete dialog instances of an existing SAP system, you have to run SAPinst to delete them locally on each dialog instance host.

Standalone host agent The host agent is automatically uninstalled from a host together with the last remaining SAP system instance.If you want to uninstall a standalone host agent, deselect Profiles Available and select Uninstall Standalone Host Agent on the General SAP System Parameters screen.

Diagnostics agent If you want to delete a diagnostics agent instance, enter the location of the profile directory of the diagnostics agent that you want to uninstall on the General SAP System Parameters screen:<Drive>:\usr\sap\<DASID>\SYS\profile

4. When you have finished, delete the relevant directory structure on the global host.

5. Delete the local user group SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin manually as follows:

1. Choose Start Programs Administrative Tools Computer Management .

2. Choose Local Users and Groups Groups .

3. Right-click the local group SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin and choose Delete.

6. If required, you can delete the directory \usr\sap\trans and its contents manually.

SAPinst does not delete \usr\sap\trans because it might be shared.

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually (Optional)

7.20.1 Deleting the Database (Optional)

You use the following procedure to delete the database of your SAP system.

CAUTION

Do not delete the database in one of the following situations:

7 Additional Information

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually (Optional)

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 135/196

Page 136: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ You are running multiple components on one database (MCOD) and you only want to delete

one or more of your components but not the complete system

■ You want to delete the Java part of an SAP system (ABAP+Java or Java Add-In).

In this case, you delete the corresponding database schema as described in Deleting a Database Schema

Manually [page 137].

Procedure

1. Log on as user db2<dbsid>.

2. Start a DB2 command prompt (db2cmd) by entering the following command:

%DB2PATH%\BIN\db2cmd

3. Enter the following command:

db2 drop database <DBSID>

7.20.2 Deleting a DB2 Instance

You use the following procedure to delete the DB2 instance of your SAP system.

CAUTION

Do not delete the DB2 instance in one of the following situations:

■ You are running multiple components on one database (MCOD) and you only want to delete

one or more of your components but not the complete system

■ You want to delete the Java part of an SAP system (ABAP+Java or Java Add-In).

In this case, you delete the corresponding database schema as described in Deleting a Database Schema

Manually [page 137].

Procedure

1. Log on as user Administrator on the local machine.

2. Stop the DB2 instance db2<dbsid> that you want to delete.

1. Choose Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools .

2. Choose Services.

3. Select the service DB2 — DB2<DBSID>-<partition>.

4. Choose Stop.

3. Start a command prompt and enter the following command:

%DB2PATH%\instance\db2idrop db2<dbsid>

4. Choose Start Settings Control Panel System Environment .

5. Select the entries for DB2 in the list box User variables for db2<dbsid> one by one.

6. Choose Delete.

7. Delete the directories \DB2<DBSID> and \db2\<DBSID>.

8. Delete the users db2<dbsid> and the database connect user.

7 Additional Information

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually (Optional)

136/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 137: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

sap<sapsid> is the default connect user. You can change this user during the installation.

To do so, proceed as follows:

■ If db2<dbsid> and the database connect user are local users, log on as local administrator.

Delete the users with the User Manager.

■ If db2<dbsid> and the database connect user are domain users, log on as domain administrator.

Delete the users using the Domain User Manager.

9. Delete the groups db<dbsid>adm, db<dbsid>ctl, db<dbsid>mnt, DB2ADMNS_<DBSID> and

DB2USERS_<DBSID> as follows:

■ If the groups exist locally, log on as local administrator. Delete the groups with the User

Manager.

■ If the groups exist in the domain, log on as domain administrator. Delete the groups using

the Domain User Manager.

7.20.3 Deleting a Database Schema Manually (Optional)

You use the following procedure to delete a database schema — but not the complete database — that

is, you have to delete all tables (and indexes), views, and tablespaces belonging to the schema.

You delete a database schema in one of the following situations:

■ You are running multiple components on one database (MCOD) and you only want to delete the

database schema of the corresponding component to be deleted.

■ You want to delete the Java part of an ABAP+Java system.

Prerequisites

■ Make sure that any instance that uses the schema is stopped.

■ The database must be up and running.

Procedure

1. Log on to the database server as db2<dbsid> and open a command prompt.

2. Create a script to delete all tables of the database schema by entering the following SQL statement:

db2 “ SELECT 'DROP TABLE' || CHR(34) || VARCHAR(tabschema) || CHR(34) || '.' || CHR

(34) || tabname || CHR(34) || ';' from syscat.tables where

tabschema='<SAP_SYSTEM_SCHEMA>' AND TYPE='T' “ | find “DROP” >

drop_<sap_system_schema>_tables.txt

where <SAP_SYSTEM_SCHEMA> is the name of the connect user.

3. Create a second script to delete all views of the database schema by entering the following SQL

statement:

db2 “ SELECT 'DROP VIEW' || CHR(34) || VARCHAR(tabschema) || CHR(34) || '.' || CHR

(34) || tabname || CHR(34) || ';' from syscat.tables where

7 Additional Information

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually (Optional)

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 137/196

Page 138: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

tabschema='<SAP_SYSTEM_SCHEMA>' AND TYPE='V' “ | find “DROP” >

drop_<sap_system_schema>_views.txt

where <SAP_SYSTEM_SCHEMA> is the connect user.

4. Delete all tables by running the first script using the following command:

db2 —tvs drop_<sap_system_schema>_tables.txt

5. Delete all views by running the second script using the following command:

db2 —tvf drop_<sap_system_schema>_views.txt

6. Check for special DB2 functions using the following command:

db2 "select FUNCNAME from SYSCAT.FUNCTIONS WHERE funcschema='<SAP_SYSTEM_SCHEMA>'"

<DB2_FUNCTION>

7. If DB2 special functions exist, delete them using the following command:

db2 drop function <DB2_FUNCTION>

8. Drop the database schema using the following command:

db2 drop schema <SAP_SYSTEM_SCHEMA> restrict

9. Delete all tablespaces by performing the following steps:

1. To see an overview, list all tablespaces by entering the following command:

db2 list tablespaces

2. In an ABAP-only or Java-only system, delete all tablespaces starting with <SAPSID>#.

3. When deleting only a Java Add-In for ABAP, delete only the Add-In tablespaces, that is

<SAPSID>#DBD and <SAPSID>#DBI.

4. To delete the required tablespaces, enter the following command:

db2 drop tablespace <tablespace_name>

7.20.4 Deleting the DB2 Software Installation (Optional)

Procedure

CAUTION

If you have several installation copies and the one to be deleted is the default copy, deletion is not

possible. You first have to switch the default copy to be deleted to a non default copy. You can

delete the default installation copy only if it is the only one existing.

1. Check that no DB2 instance exists in the installation copy that you want to delete. To do so, open

a CMD window and enter the following command:

%DB2PATH%\BIN\db2ilist.exe

NOTE

If no instance is listed, you can continue with step 2. If any instance is listed, you must delete

this instance as described in Deleting a DB2 Instance [page 135] before you can delete the database

software.

7 Additional Information

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually (Optional)

138/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 139: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

2. Log on as user ADMINISTRATOR on the local machine.

3. Make sure that the SAP system is not running. If the instance is started, stop the SAP system using

Stop in the SAP Service Manager.

4. Stop the SAP services as follows:

1. Choose Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Services

2. Select the service SAPOSCOL.

3. Choose Stop.

4. Repeat step b and c for the service SAP<SAPSID>_<Instance number>.

5. Stop the DB2 instance db2<dbsid>.

1. Choose Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Services .

2. Select the service DB2 — DB2<DBSID>-<partition>.

3. Choose Stop.

6. Stop the DB2 Security Server.

1. Choose Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Services .

2. Select the service DB2 Security Server.

3. Choose Stop.

7. To delete the software, choose Start Settings Control Panel Add/Remove Programs DB2 ESE <name

of DB2 copy> Remove :

Alternatively, if this option does not work for any reasons, you have to manually delete the software

as follows:

1. Open a command prompt and enter the following command:

%DB2PATH%\BIN\db2unins —p ESE

2. After completing the uninstall program, delete all files that were not deleted by the uninstall

program from the %DB2PATH% directory.

3. Remove %DB2PATH% from the directory.

4. Delete all entries concerning DB2 in the registry if any exist.

1. Choose Start Programs <Registry editor> (the name of the registry editor depends on

your installation).

Alternatively:

At the command prompt, enter the following command:

regedit

2. Choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE on Local Machine SOFTWARE IBM DB2

InstalledCopies .

3. If it still exists, delete the key SAPDB2<DBSID> including the subordinate entries.

4. Choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE on Local Machine SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Control

Session Manager Environment .

5. Delete all keys starting with DB2.

6. To edit the string, choose Path and proceed as follows:

7 Additional Information

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually (Optional)

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 139/196

Page 140: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Delete %DB2PATH%\BIN; %DB2PATH%\FUNCTION and %DB2PATH%\SAMPLES\REPL from the

path.

7. Choose HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE on Local Machine SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services .

8. If any exist, delete all entries starting with DB2.

9. To activate the changes, shut down Windows.

7 Additional Information

7.20 Deleting the Database Instance and Database Software Manually (Optional)

140/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 141: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Only valid for: HA (MSCS) |

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

You can install a high-availability SAP system with MSCS. The MSCS software improves the availability

of the system and safeguards it against failure and unplanned downtime, enabling 24-hour operation,

365 days a year.

With high availability you enable critical system components, known as “Single Points of Failure

(SPOFs)”, to be automatically switched from one machine to the other, if hardware or software problems

arise on one machine. With the help of this switchover – or failover – the system can continue

functioning.

Apart from enabling failover when hardware problems occur, you can also use MSCS to avoid downtime

when you perform essential system maintenance. If you need to maintain one host (MSCS node), you

can deliberately switch the cluster resources to the other host (MSCS node) and temporarily operate

it there while maintenance is in progress. When maintenance work is finished you can easily move the

resources back to their original node and continue operating them there.

When you are setting up the SAP system with MSCS, you combine standard installation steps, described

earlier in this documentation, with cluster-specific steps, described here.

NOTE

As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including EHP2 (and higher), SAP adapted the installation procedure for

a high-availability system on Windows to make it easier and less error-prone for customers. The

new installation procedure was first implemented for SAP systems based on NetWeaver 7.1

including EHP1. For more information, see:

■ New Features [page 10]

■ The document New Installation Options for a High-Availability SAP System Based on SAP NetWeaver 7.1

Including EHP1 (7.11) in a Microsoft Cluster, which you can download from http://

www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/go/portal/prtroot/docs/library/uuid/

a0b86598-35c5-2b10-4bad-890edeb4c8f2?overridelayout=true

You have the following options to install a high-availability system with MSCS:

■ You install one SAP system in one MSCS cluster.

■ You install one SAP system in two MSCS clusters.

■ You install several SAP systems in one or more MSCS cluster(s) with two and more MSCS nodes.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 141/196

Page 142: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

If your database supports the installation on several MSCS nodes, you can install the database

instance on more than two MSCS nodes in one MSCS cluster.

CAUTION

Make sure that you read SAP Note 1387319, which contains the most recent information as well

as corrections for a high-availability installation. For more information, see the SAP installation

notes [page 13] before you begin the installation.

Restrictions

To install a new SAP system with MSCS, you have to perform a number of extra steps specially required

for the cluster and configure the SAP system so that it can take advantage of the cluster functionality:

■ Since the cluster hardware has at least two nodes that have access to all local and shared storage

devices, you have to install some components on all nodes and observe special rules for distributing

components to local or shared disks.

■ Since the correct configuration of network addresses is absolutely essential to enable the cluster

to function properly, you have to perform a number of additional steps that are necessary to set

up and check addressing.

■ You must install and configure the (A)SCS instance to run on two MSCS nodes in one MSCS

cluster.

NOTE

If you have an existing SAP system and plan to migrate to a cluster with new hardware, you install

the SAP system using a system copy.

For more information about the system copy, see the System Copy Guide for your SAP system at:

http://service.sap.com/instguides <Release> Installation

The documentation for system copy does not include the cluster-specific information, which is

described here.

Support Conditions

The following conditions for SAP support apply to:

■ One clustered SAP system in one MSCS cluster with two MSCS nodes or one clustered SAP system

in two MSCS clusters

If you have one of these MSCS configurations and you use SAPinst to install such an MSCS system,

you get SAP support with the installation, configuration, and operation.

■ Multiple SAP systems with one or more MSCS cluster(s) and two or more MSCS nodes

For such complex MSCS systems you need in-depth knowledge of and experience with the

Windows operating system, the Microsoft Cluster Service, the sizing and clustering of an SAP

system. Therefore, the sizing, installation, and configuration of such an MSCS system must

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

142/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 143: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

be performed by an SAP Global Technology Partner, who supports any installation and

configuration problems that arise from this MSCS configuration.

Only then does SAP support the operation of this MSCS system.

Terminology

■ In this documentation the hosts in an MSCS cluster are referred to as first MSCS node and additional

MSCS node(s):

● The first MSCS node is the MSCS node where you perform the general installation of an SAP

system, for example where the database or (A)SCS instance is to be installed.

● The additional MSCS node is the node where you configure the already installed SAP

instances to run in MSCS.

■ As of Windows Server 2008 there are the following terminology changes for a cluster configuration:

● The cluster feature is now called Failover Clustering. For practical reasons we are continuing to

use the previous terminology Microsoft Cluster Service and abbreviation MSCS in this guide.

● Cluster groups are now called services and applications.

In some sections that are also valid for Windows Server 2008 (R2) on MSCS we are continuing

to use only the old term. In this case, “cluster group” also means “service and application”.

● The Cluster Administrator is now called Failover Cluster Manager.

8.1 Installation Checklist for a High-Availability System

This section includes the steps that you have to perform for your SAP system using Microsoft Cluster

Service. Detailed information about the steps is available in the relevant section.

Planning

1. You check that you have completed the same planning activities [page 21] as for a non-HA system,

including the hardware and software requirements [page 29].

2. You decide how to set up your SAP system components in an MSCS configuration [page 145].

3. You decide how to distribute SAP system components to disks for MSCS [page 152].

4. You read Directories in an MSCS Configuration [page 156].

5. You read IP Addresses in an MSCS Configuration [page 157].

6. You obtain IP addresses for MSCS [page 161].

Preparation

1. You check that you have completed the same preparations [page 57] as for a non-HA system.

2. On all MSCS nodes, you manually assign drive letters to the shared disks [page 163]. All MSCS nodes must

access the shared disks with the same drive letters.

3. You map the IP addresses to host names [page 163] on the Domain Name System (DNS) Server or in the

hosts file.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.1 Installation Checklist for a High-Availability System

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 143/196

Page 144: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

4. You check the mapping of host names for MSCS [page 164].

5. Windows Server 2003: If you have already one clustered SAP system, and you want to you use

multiple systems in this MSCS cluster, you must adapt the existing SAP system for the installation of multiple

systems in one MSCS cluster [page 165].

6. Windows Server 2003: You prepare your system for the installation of multiple SAP systems in one cluster [page

168].

7. To make sure that all preparation steps have been correctly performed, check that you can move

the disk resources from one MSCS node to another so that they are only accessible from a single

node at any time.

Installation

1. You make sure that:

1. You are logged on as domain administrator, unless otherwise specified.

2. You do not use the user <sapsid>adm unless specified.

3. If you are prompted during the installation process, log off and log on again.

4. When you reboot during the installation process [page 183] on one MSCS node, you pause the other

nodes before the reboot. Otherwise, resources fail over to the other nodes.

2. You prepare the database for MSCS [page 173].

3. In the Cluster Administrator (Windows Server 2003) or Failover Cluster Manager (Windows Server 2008

(R2)) you move all disk groups and the cluster group to the first MSCS node [page 182].

4. You cluster the first MSCS node [page 171].

5. You install the database instance on an MSCS node [page 172].

6. You configure the database for MSCS [page 174].

7. You cluster the additional MSCS node [page 175].

8. You install the central instance [page 177] on the central instance host or on a local disk on the MSCS

node.

9. You install at least one dialog instance [page 177] on the dialog instance host or on a local disk on the

MSCS node.

Post-Installation

1. You perform the post-installation checks for the enqueue replication server [page 179].

2. You perform the same post-installation steps [page 85] as for a non-HA system.

3. If you want to use the DBA Cockpit in your MSCS environment, you must apply SAP Note

978319.

Additional Information

■ Moving MSCS Groups or Services and Applications [page 182]

■ Rebooting During the Installation or Conversion for MSCS [page 183]

■ Starting and Stopping the SAP System in an MSCS Configuration [page 183].

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.1 Installation Checklist for a High-Availability System

144/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 145: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

8.2 Planning

The following sections provide information about how to plan the installation of the SAP system for

MSCS. For a complete list of all steps, see section Planning in the Installation Checklist for a High-Availability

System [page 143].

8.2.1 System Configuration in MSCS

The following chapters provide information about the configuration of your SAP system configuration

in MSCS. It describes the components you have to install for an SAP system running in a cluster, and

how to distribute them on the specific host. For more information, see:

■ SAP System Components in an MSCS Configuration [page 145]

■ Multiple SAP Systems in one MSCS Cluster [page 148]

■ Multiple SAP Systems in Multiple MSCS Cluster [page 150]

■ Enqueue Replication Server in MSCS [page 151]

8.2.1.1 SAP System Components in an MSCS Configuration

In an MSCS configuration you have the following components for your SAP system:

SAP System Components in an MSCS Configuration

ComponentNumber of Components per SAP System Single Point of Failure (SPOF)

ASCS instance (message services and enqueue services)

1 yes

Database instance 1 yes

Application server (central instance, dialog instance)

1-<n> no

■ To protect the SPOFs ((A)SCS instance, database instance) you have to use MSCS.

If a hardware or software problem occurs on the first MSCS node, the clustered (A)SCS instance

and the clustered database automatically fail over to the other node.

If you need to maintain the MSCS node where the (A)SCS instance and database are running you

can switch these instances to the other node. When maintenance work is finished you move the

(A)SCS and database instance back to the original node.

■ To protect system components that are non-SPOFs, for example application servers, you have to

install them as multiple components. In this case you must install at least two application servers

(one central instance and at least one dialog instance) on two different hosts. You have the following

options:

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 145/196

Page 146: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

● You install the central instance and the dialog instance on the MSCS nodes of an MSCS cluster.

You install them on a local disk. Any additional dialog instances are installed on hosts outside

of the MSCS cluster.

If you have to maintain an MSCS node, you have to stop the central or dialog instance on that

node. When you have finished maintenance, you restart the instances.

NOTE

If you install the central instance and the dialog instance on the MSCS cluster nodes,

you must perform the hardware sizing for the MSCS host, as in this case the application

server is always running on this host. This increases system load and might impact

performance. Note that, as usual in an MSCS setup, the (A)SCS and database instances

also switch to run on the MSCS host in the event of failover, which temporarily also

increases system load.

● You install the central instance and all dialog instances on hosts, which are not part of a

Microsoft cluster.

The following figures show examples for the installation of SPOFs and non-SPOFs of an SAP system in

an MSCS cluster with two nodes.

The first figure shows an MSCS configuration where the non-SPOFs components (central instance,

dialog instance) are installed locally on the MSCS nodes. Any additional dialog instances are installed

outside the MSCS cluster on separate hosts.

Figure 13: ABAP System with SPOFs, where non-SPOFs are installed locally on the MSCS Cluster

Nodes

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

146/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 147: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The following figure shows an MSCS configuration, where the non-SPOFs components (central

instance, dialog instance) are installed on separate hosts that are not part of the Microsoft cluster.

Figure 14: ABAP System where the non-SPOFs are installed on hosts outside of the MS Cluster

SAP System Components in Two MSCS Clusters

Besides installing your SAP system within one MSCS cluster, you can also set up two MSCS clusters

and distribute the SPOF system components on these clusters to protect them against system failure.

The following figure shows an example where the database instance for the SAP system is installed in

one MSCS cluster, and the (A)SCS instance is installed on the second MSCS cluster. The application

servers (central and dialog instance) can either be installed on a local disk on the MSCS nodes or on

separate hosts that are not part of the Microsoft cluster.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 147/196

Page 148: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 15: ABAP System

8.2.1.2 Multiple SAP Systems In One MSCS Cluster

CAUTION

For such a complex MSCS system you need in-depth knowledge of and experience with the

Windows operating system, the Microsoft Cluster Service, the sizing and clustering of an SAP

system. Therefore, the installation and configuration of such an MSCS system must be

performed by an SAP Global Technology Partner, who supports any installation and configuration

problems that arise from this MSCS configuration. Only then does SAP support the operation of

multiple SAP systems in one MSCS cluster.

Until now, SAP has only supported the installation of one clustered SAP system in one MSCS cluster

with two MSCS nodes. This was because the cluster share sapmnt resource could only be assigned to

one cluster group and could only point to one shared drive. However, additional clustered SAP systems

require additional cluster groups, shared disks, and a unique IP and network name, as well as an

sapmnt share. Adding an additional sapmnt share is not possible as it already exists and points to the

shared disk of the first clustered SAP system.

The solution is to rename the cluster share sapmnt resource into sapmnt<SAPSID>.

On the local disk, which must have the same disk letter on all MSCS nodes, you create the usr\sap

\<SID> folders on all nodes and set the saploc and sapmnt shares on usr\sap. Then you create junctions

on the local disk pointing to the relevant SYS and <Instance><Number> folders on the shared disks on

all nodes.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

148/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 149: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

CAUTION

All additional local instances like an enqueue replication server, central instance, or dialog instance

are installed on the local disk where the saploc share is pointing to. Make sure that you have

enough space on this local disk.

With this configuration, every SAP system is placed in a separate MSCS cluster group with the unique

name SAP <SAPSID>. Each cluster group has its own shared disk, IP address, network name,

sapmnt<SID> share, as well as a generic service and the SAP resource. SAP cluster groups belonging to

different SAP systems run separately and independently from each other.

If you have such an MSCS configuration with three and more MSCS nodes, the following restrictions

apply:

■ The (A)SCS instance must be installed and configured to run on two MSCS nodes in one MSCS

cluster.

■ If the database supports the installation on several MSCS nodes, the database instance can be

installed on more than two MSCS nodes in one MSCS cluster.

The following figure shows the installation of multiple SAP systems in one MSCS cluster. For each SAP

system you have to install one central and at least one dialog instance.

Figure 16: Multiple SAP Systems in one MSCS Cluster

The following table shows what additional SAP systems you can install in one MSCS cluster if you

already have a clustered SAP system.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 149/196

Page 150: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Multiple SAP Systems in One MSCS Cluster

First Clustered System Based On Additional SAP Systems Based On

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher ABAP

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher Java

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher ABAP+Java

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher ABAP

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher Java

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x> and higher ABAP+Java

■ SAP NetWeaver '04 SR1 ABAP system (kernel 6.40, ABAP Patch Level 90)

■ SAP NetWeaver '04 SR1 Java system (kernel 6.40, SP 18)

■ SAP NetWeaver '04 SR1 ABAP+Java system (kernel 6.40, SP 18)

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher ABAP

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher Java

■ SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP<x>, and higher ABAP+Java

8.2.1.3 Multiple SAP Systems In Multiple MSCS Clusters

Besides installing multiple SAP systems in one MSCS cluster, it is also possible to install multiple SAP

systems in several MSCS clusters with two or more MSCS nodes.

NOTE

The MSCS software supports up to 16 MSCS nodes.

CAUTION

For such a complex MSCS system you need in-depth knowledge of and experience with the

Windows operating system, the Microsoft Cluster Service, the sizing and clustering of an SAP

system. Therefore, the installation and configuration of such an MSCS system must be

performed by an SAP Global Technology Partner, who supports any installation and configuration

problems that arise from this MSCS configuration. Only then does SAP support the operation of

multiple SAP systems in multiple MSCS clusters.

For this MSCS configuration the following restrictions apply:

■ The (A)SCS instance must be installed and configured to run on two MSCS nodes in one MSCS

cluster.

■ If the database supports the installation on several MSCS nodes, the database instance can be

installed on more than two MSCS nodes in one MSCS cluster.

The following figure shows the installation of multiple SAP systems in two MSCS clusters with three

nodes. In this example, the SCS and ASCS instances are installed in the first MSCS cluster, and the

database instances for the two SAP systems are installed on the second MSCS cluster. The application

servers (central and dialog instance) can be either installed on a local disk on the MSCS nodes or outside

the MSCS cluster on separate hosts.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

150/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 151: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

If you use an enqueue replication server, you must install the enqueue replication server, and the

(A)SCS instance on two nodes.

Figure 17: Multiple SAP Systems in Two MSCS Clusters

8.2.1.4 Enqueue Replication Server in an MSCS Configuration

The enqueue replication server contains a replica of the lock table (replication table) and is an essential

component in a high-availability setup. It is installed on the two MSCS nodes where the (A)SCS instance

is installed and configured to run.

In normal operation the replication enqueue server is always active on the host where the (A)SCS

instance is not running.

If an enqueue server in an MSCS cluster with two nodes fails on the first MSCS node, the enqueue

server on the additional MSCS node is started. It retrieves the data from the replication table on that

node and writes it in its lock table. The enqueue replication server on the second MSCS node then

becomes inactive. If the first MSCS node is available again, the enqueue replication server on the second

MSCS node becomes active again.

The following figure shows the enqueue replication server mechanism in an MSCS configuration with

two nodes:

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 151/196

Page 152: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 18: Enqueue Replication Server Mechanism on One MSCS Cluster with Two Nodes

8.2.2 Distribution of SAP System Components to Disks for MSCS

When planning the MSCS installation, keep in mind that the cluster hardware has two different sets

of disks:

■ Local disks that are connected directly to the MSCS nodes

■ Shared disks that can be accessed by all MSCS nodes via a shared interconnect

NOTE

Shared disk is a synonym for the MSCS resource of Resource type Physical disk.

You need to install the SAP system components in both the following ways:

■ Separately on all MSCS nodes to use the local storage on each node

■ On the shared storage used in common by all MSCS nodes

You install the following on different shared disks:

● Database instance files

● (A)SCS instance

● SAP system executables

● Single quorum device, if used

CAUTION

You must not install any SAP or database components on the quorum disk.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

152/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 153: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The following figure shows a cluster configuration, where the (A)SCS and DB instance are installed in

the same cluster. It illustrates how to distribute the database data files, the SAP system executables, and

the quorum resource (if used) to different disks. Only with this distribution of files to distinct disks is

it possible to move the SAP system and database as separate entities in a failover situation.

Figure 19: Distribution of SAP System Components in MSCS

Quorum Configurations on Windows

On Windows there are several quorum configurations available. The configuration to use mainly

depends on the cluster setup, such as the number of cluster nodes, the storage type (single or

distributed), and the number of data centers. For more information, see the Windows documentation.

The default quorum configurations used on Windows are:

■ Single Quorum Device Cluster – default quorum configuration on Windows Server 2003

NOTE

On Windows Server 2008 (R2), this quorum configuration is called “No Majority: Disk Only”.

However, we do not recommend you to use this.

In this cluster model, the quorum resource maintains the cluster configuration data on a single

shared disk. The quorum resource is unique in this cluster configuration and is always owned by

one of the nodes. The quorum disk is a single resource so that if it becomes unavailable, the cluster

does not work.

The quorum resource has the following main functions in the cluster:

● It logs changes to the cluster configuration that are entered in the Registry.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 153/196

Page 154: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

● It arbitrates between competing nodes when the communication between nodes breaks down.

This means that cluster resources are forced to fail over to the node that owns the quorum

resource.

■ Node and Disk Majority – default quorum configuration on Windows Server 2008 (R2)

With this quorum configuration, each node and the witness disk maintain its own copy of the

cluster configuration data. This ensures that the cluster configuration is kept running even if the

witness disk fails or is offline.

Note that the disk layout of the Node and Disk Majority and the Single Quorum Device Cluster

is identical.

CAUTION

If you do not use the default quorum configuration for your operating system, contact your

hardware partner, who can help you to analyze your needs and set up your cluster model. SAP

supports these configurations if they are part of a cluster solution offered by your Original

Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), or Independent Hardware Vendor (IHV).

Locally Dispersed Cluster

The standard MSCS configuration consists of two cluster nodes and a shared disk storage with all

technical components located in the same data center. In a geographically dispersed cluster, also know

as a geospan cluster, the cluster nodes are distributed across at least two data centers to avoid the full

outage of a data center in the event of disaster.

A locally dispersed MSCS configuration requires a more sophisticated disk storage architecture since

a shared disk storage can be only located in one data center and might be therefore a single point of

failure (SPOF). To prevent the disk storage becoming a SPOF, you have to configure the storage system

in each data center and to replicate its content to the storage system of the other data center.

Replication can either be synchronous or asynchronous, which depends on the:

■ Functionality of the disk storage subsystem

■ Acceptable amount of data loss during a failover

■ Physical layout of the disk storage area network

This includes the distance between the storage systems, signal latency, capacity, and speed of the

network connection.

■ Customer budget

■ Functionality supported by the database vendor

The database components in geospan configurations are often no longer part of the MSCS and the

database is replicated by pure database techniques, such as shadow database, log shipping, and mirrored

database.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

154/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 155: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

CAUTION

■ Currently you can configure locally dispersed clusters only in the same subnet since you

cannot (Windows Server 2003) or must not (Windows Server 2008 (R2)) change a virtual IP

address during failover.

■ The numerous variants with locally dispersed cluster configurations and the complex

technical requirements are the reasons why the installation and configuration of such high-

availability (HA) systems are not directly supported by SAP. Instead, the hardware vendors

of this cluster configuration are responsible for the installation, configuration, and operation

of the HA components running in locally dispersed clusters. SAP only supports the standard

operation and function of the SAP components running in such MSCS configurations.

All functions to set up locally dispersed clusters are already integrated in Windows Server 2008 (R2).

If you use Windows Server 2003, refer to the following information to set up locally dispersed clusters:

■ White paper Server Clusters: Majority Node Set Quorum at:

http://technet2.microsoft.com/WindowsServer/en/ library/ e70333db-5048-4a56-

b5a9-8353756de10b1033.mspx.

■ Information about the file share witness feature, at:

http://support.microsoft.com/kb/921181

Distribution of Database Files in a RAID Configuration

CAUTION

Microsoft does not support host-based RAID configurations (Dynamic Disks) on shared disks.

Depending on the disks available and the size of your system, various disk configurations are possible,

but you must always locate the database data and database log files on separate volumes.

The following figure shows a secure method to distribute the database directories to different RAID

volumes.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 155/196

Page 156: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 20:

More Information

Directories in an MSCS Configuration [page 156]

8.2.3 Directories in an MSCS Configuration

The following tables show the directories where the main software components for the SAP cluster

installation are stored:

Directories on Local Disks on MSCS Nodes

Component Default Directory

A supported operating system [page 29] %windir%

MSCS software %windir%\Cluster

SAP cluster files %windir%\SAPCluster

Windows Server 2003 only:Junctions for multiple SAP systems in one MSCS cluster

<local_drive>:\usr\sap\SAPSID<n>\[Junction]

Application server (if installed locally) <local_drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\<Instance>

Directory for the DB2 database software, which is created during installation of DB2 server software. SAPinst uses this directory for the integrated database software installation.

NOTE

As of DB2 V9.1 and higher, you can have multiple DB2 copies on one machine.

<drive>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\db2_software

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

156/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 157: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Directories on Shared Disks

Component Default Directory

Cluster quorum resource (if used) <drive>:\MSCS (Windows Server 2003)<drive>:\Cluster (Windows Server 2008 (R2))

SAP global and instance directories <drive>:\usr\sap ...

DB2 database directory <drive>:\DB2<DBSID>

DB2 online log files <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\log_dir

DB2 diagnostic log files <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\db2dump

SAP data directories for an SAP system.By default, SAPinst creates four sapdata directories (sapdata1, sapdata2, sapdata3, sapdata4).

NOTE

■ In a production system, you must make sure that the sapdata directories are located in different file systems. Otherwise, system performance can decrease. For more information, see Data Safety and Performance Considerations for Database Directories [page 53].

■ If you require more or fewer sapdata directories, you can change this on the SAPinst Sapdata Directories dialog.

■ If you add additional sapdata directories during the dialog phase of SAPinst, the corresponding tablespace containers are equally distributed.

■ With DB2's automatic storage management:<drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\sapdata<n>

■ No automatic storage management:<drive>:\db2\<SAPSID>\sapdata<n>

SapCluster Directory

In an SAP cluster installation, an additional directory – %WINDIR%\SapCluster – is created under the

system directory.

This contains all the SAP files required by all MSCS cluster nodes, independently of the MSCS node

the SAP instance is running on. The files are database tools and program files (executables) used by the

operating system monitor (SAPOsCol).

The directory is added to the path variable of the user <sapsid>adm.

8.2.4 IP Addresses in an MSCS Configuration

A part of the installation process that is unique to MSCS is the configuration of host names and IP

addresses in the network. This is a particularly important task because the addressing plays a key role

in the switchover procedure. Addressing must be set up correctly so that the system can take advantage

of the cluster functionality and switch between nodes when hardware problems arise.

This section explains the different types of IP addresses and their function in the switchover mechanism

of one MSCS cluster with two MSCS nodes.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 157/196

Page 158: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 (R2) only:

As of Windows Server 2008 (R2), besides static IP addresses, you can also have DHCP-based

(dynamic) IP addresses. The DHCP-based IP addresses are currently only supported when all MSCS

nodes are located in the same subnet.

If the network adapters are assigned to DHCP-based IP addresses, the virtual IP addresses are also

configured automatically as DHCP-based IP addresses.

Types of IP Addresses

In a correctly configured cluster with at least two nodes, there are at least seven IP addresses and

corresponding host names for your SAP system. You have two IP addresses for each MSCS node, one

IP address for the cluster, one for the SAP cluster group, and one for the database cluster group.

Some of the addresses are assigned to the network adapters (cards), others are virtual IP addresses

that are assigned to the cluster groups.

Physical IP Addresses Assigned to Network Adapters

An MSCS configuration has two networks:

■ A public network that is used for the communication between the central instance, application

servers, and the LAN.

■ A private network that is used internally for communication between the nodes of the cluster.

NOTE

For more information about network configuration, see the Microsoft Knowledge Base Article

259267.

The following figure shows an MSCS cluster with two nodes and illustrates the adapters required for

the public and private networks, and their corresponding physical IP addresses. A physical IP address,

as opposed to a virtual one, is stationary and permanently mapped to the same adapter.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

158/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 159: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 21: Adapters and IP Addresses Required for Public and Private Networks in an MSCS Cluster

with Two Nodes

Host Names Assigned to Network Adapters

Each of the physical IP addresses of the network adapters must have a corresponding host name. For

example, on the left-hand node in the figure above, you might assign the IP addresses of the public and

private network adapters as follows:

IP Addresses and Host Names

Network Adapter IP Address Host Name

Adapter 1 (private network) 10.1.1.1 clusA_priv

Adapter 3 ( public network) 129.20.5.1 clusA

CAUTION

■ The IP address and host name of the public network adapter is also the IP address and name

of the machine. In our example, this means that the machine that is the MSCS node on the

left in the figure has the name clusA.

■ Do not confuse the host name with the computer name. Each node also has a computer

name, which is often the same as the host name.

The computer name is displayed in the node column of the Cluster Administrator (Windows

Server 2003) or Failover Cluster Management (Windows Server 2008 (R2). However, it is not required

for the TCP/IP communication in the cluster. When you configure IP addresses and

corresponding names, keep in mind that it is the host names that are important for the

cluster, not the computer names.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 159/196

Page 160: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Virtual IP Addresses Assigned to Cluster Groups

When you have installed the SAP system and fully configured the cluster, the critical system resources

are bound together in three different groups. Each of these groups requires a virtual IP address and

host name that is permanently mapped to the group and not to a particular node. This has the advantage

that, whenever a group is moved between nodes, its IP address and host name move together with it.

An MSCS configuration has the following groups:

■ SAP cluster group for each clustered SAP system

■ Database cluster group for each clustered SAP system

■ Cluster group

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 (R2) only:

Although it exists, the cluster group is not visible.

Each group consists of a set of related resources that work together to offer a service to the system. For

example, the database cluster group comprises all the resources that enable the database server to fulfill

the requests of a client. When the group is moved from one node to the other, due to node failure, the

virtual IP address and host name move with it. Therefore, there is a failover not only of resources, but

also of the virtual IP address and host name. As a result, all clients can still reach the database server

with the same IP address as before.

The following figure illustrates how the virtual IP addresses of the database group and SAP group can

move from one node to the other when failover occurs.

Figure 22: Failover of Virtual IP Addresses

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

160/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 161: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

8.2.5 Obtaining and Determining IP Addresses for MSCS

This chapter describes how to obtain and to find out the IP addresses for the network adapters (cards)

that are required to install and run your cluster configuration.

You need to correctly configure IP addresses for a cluster system. During the installation procedure

you have to assign at least seven IP addresses and host names. You normally obtain these names and

addresses from the system administrator.

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 (R2) only:

As of Windows Server 2008 (R2), besides static IP addresses you can use DHCP-based IP addresses.

The following information is only relevant if you use static IP addresses.

Procedure

Obtaining IP Addresses

Ask the system administrator to give you the addresses and host names listed in the tables below, which

shows an example for a configuration with one MSCS cluster with two nodes. You need to enter the

addresses and host names later during the installation process.

The column Defined During indicates at which stage of the installation of the operating system and the

SAP system the addresses are defined in the system.

CAUTION

Use the names exactly as specified by the system administrator, carefully observing uppercase

and lowercase letters.

NOTE

In the following tables we are only using the Windows Server 2003 terminology cluster group, and

not the Windows Server 2008 (R2) terminology service and application.

Physical IP Addresses

ComponentExample for Physical IP Address

Example for Physical Host Name Purpose Defined During

First MSCS Node:adapter for private network

10.1.1.1 clusA_priv Address for internode communication on the private network

Windows installation

First MSCS Node:adapter for public network

129.20.5.1 clusA Address of the first MSCS node for communication with application servers and LAN (this is the same as the address of the first MSCS node)

Windows installation

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 161/196

Page 162: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

ComponentExample for Physical IP Address

Example for Physical Host Name Purpose Defined During

Additional MSCS Node:adapter for private network

10.1.1.2 clusB_priv Address for internode communication on the private network

Windows installation

Additional MSCS Node:adapter for public network

129.20.5.2 clusB Address of the additional MSCS node for communication with application servers and LAN (this is the same as the address of the additional MSCS node)

Windows installation

Virtual IP Addresses

ComponentExample for Virtual IP Address

Example for Host Name Purpose Defined During

Cluster group 129.20.5.3 clusgrp Virtual address and name of the cluster group. It identifies the cluster and is used for administration purposes.

MSCS software installation

SAP cluster group 129.20.5.4 sapgrp Virtual address and name for accessing the group of SAP resources, regardless of the node it is running on

Configuration of SAP system for MSCS with SAPinst on the first node

Database cluster group

129.20.5.5 dbgrp Virtual address and name for accessing the group of database resources, regardless of the node it is running on

Execution of MSCS wizard or database-specific cluster scripts

Determining Existing IP Addresses

To find out the existing IP addresses and corresponding host names and addresses, proceed as follows:

1. For Windows Server 2003 choose Start Control Panel Network Connections .

For Windows Server 2008 (R2) choose Start Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Manage network

connections .

2. Right-click one of the network cards that are displayed (default name is Local Area Connection) and

choose Properties.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.2 Planning

162/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 163: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. Choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties .

The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box appears and shows the IP address of the initially

selected network card.

4. To find out the host name that is mapped to the IP address, use the ping command:

ping -a <IP_Address>

The system returns the host name assigned to the IP address.

Do not forget to ping your local machine as well.

5. Repeat these steps for the other network cards.

For more information about IP addresses in the cluster environment, see IP Addresses in an MSCS

Configuration [page 157].

8.3 Preparation

The following sections provide information about how to prepare the installation of the SAP system

for MSCS. For a complete list of all steps, see section Preparation in the Installation Checklist for a High-Availability

System [page 143].

8.3.1 Assigning Drive Letters for MSCS

We recommend that you assign drive letters to the shared disks.

In an MSCS cluster, the shared disks that can be accessed by all MSCS nodes via a common bus must

be addressed by all nodes with the same drive letters.

Procedure

1. Choose Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Storage Disk

Management.

2. Select a disk and choose Action All tasks Change Drive Letter and Paths...

3. Enter a new drive letter.

8.3.2 Mapping Host Names to IP Addresses for MSCS

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 (R2) only:

This step is not required if you use DHCP-based IP addresses.

To enable correct operation of the failover mechanism, you have to map all IP addresses in the MSCS

cluster to host names.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 163/196

Page 164: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The mapping enables the system to translate host names into IP addresses. Host names are normally

used for administrative tasks because they are easier to use than the long, numeric IP addresses. However,

the system can only respond to host names if they are translated into IP addresses.

Prerequisites

■ You have installed the Windows operating system.

■ You have the list of IP addresses [page 161].

■ You have correctly entered all IP addresses required for the MSCS configuration.

CAUTION

Missing or incorrect entries for the IP addresses can cause problems later during the

installation.

Procedure

To map the host names to the IP addresses, do one of the following:

■ Map the host names to IP addresses on a Domain Name System (DNS) server.

■ Map the IP addresses in the Windows hosts file.

The file is located in the default Windows directory:

%SystemRoot%Drive\system32\drivers\etc

■ If you use Failover Cluster Server 2008, check IPv4 host name resolution as described in SAP

Note 1365796.

RECOMMENDATION

We recommend that you perform the mapping on the DNS server because this only requires a

single entry.

If you perform the mapping in the hosts file, you have to maintain the hosts file on all MSCS

nodes of the cluster, and on all application servers and front ends. This is necessary because each

host in the system has its own hosts file.

8.3.3 Checking the Mapping of Host Names for MSCS

NOTE

Windows Server 2008 (R2) only:

This step is not required if you use DHCP-based IP addresses.

You need to check the mapping of host names to IP addresses as otherwise you might have serious

problems later.

Prerequisites

You have mapped the host names to the IP addresses [page 163] on the DNS Server or in the hosts file.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

164/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 165: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure1. For each IP address, enter the following commands:

1. ping -a <IP_Address>

The system returns the host name that is assigned to the IP address.

2. ping hostname

The system returns the IP address that is assigned to the host name.

NOTE

■ When you enter the ping command, you only receive a reply if the host already

exists.

■ If the address you are checking already exists in the system, you also receive a reply

from the host. For example, after the installation of Windows and the configuration

of the network, you receive a reply when entering the IP addresses of the network

adapters.

2. Compare the output with your own record of addresses and host names, and check for the

following possible errors:

■ Incorrect output of uppercase and lowercase

Make sure that you correct the error before you proceed with the installation.

■ Error in the network bindings

If you enter the name of the public network adapter, which is usually also the name of the

local host, and the system returns the IP address of the private network, there is an error in

the network bindings.

To correct the network bindings, do the following on all MSCS nodes:

1. Choose Start Settings Network and Dial-up Connections

The Network and Dial-up Connections window appears.

2. Choose Advanced Advanced Settings Adapters and Bindings

The network cards of the private and public networks are displayed for the current MSCS

node.

NOTE

The card of the public network must be displayed before that of the private

network. If necessary, change the order in which the cards are listed by using the

Move Up and Move Down arrows

8.3.4 Windows Server 2003: Preparing an Existing SAP System to Support Multiple Systems in one Microsoft Cluster

This section only applies if you use Windows Server 2003.

If you have already installed an SAP system in a Microsoft cluster, and you want to install an additional

SAP system in the same cluster, you have to prepare the existing clustered system to use junctions.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 165/196

Page 166: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

The following sections describe the procedure for the preparation of the:

■ (A)SCS instance

■ ABAP central instance

Prerequisites

To create the junctions, you need the tool linkd.exe from Microsoft. The executable is part of the

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit Tools, which you can download from http://

www.microsoft.com. Search for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit Tools.

NOTE

You can also use the 32-bit executable for 64-bit machines.

Procedure

Preparing the (A)SCS Instance

The following procedure applies for the:

■ SCS instance based on one of the following SAP NetWeaver Java systems:

● SAP NetWeaver 7.1 and higher

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x> or 7.0 EHP1 and higher

● SAP NetWeaver '04 SR1

■ ASCS instance of one of the following SAP NetWeaver ABAP systems based on:

● SAP NetWeaver 7.1 and higher

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x> or 7.0 EHP1 and higher

■ ASCS and SCS instance of one of the following SAP NetWeaver ABAP+Java systems based on:

● SAP NetWeaver 7.1 and higher

● SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x> or 7.0 EHP1 and higher

1. Bring the SAP <SAPSID> SAPMNT cluster resource offline.

2. Double-click on this resource and choose Properties, and then the Parameters tab.

3. Change the Share name from SAPMNT to SAPMNT<SAPSID>.

4. Install the Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit Tools that include the linkd.exe program.

5. If not available, create the folders <drive:>\usr\sap\<SAPSID> on the local disk.

CAUTION

You must create the folders on all MSCS nodes using the same local disk letter.

6. Set the file security as follows:

1. On the sap folder add the SAP_LocalAdmin local group and grant full permissions.

2. On the <SAPSID> folder add the SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin local group and add full

permissions.

7. Create the saploc share on the <local_disk:>\usr\sap\ folder and grant full access to the

SAP_LocalAdmin group and local Administrators group.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

166/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 167: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

8. Create the sapmnt share on the <local_disk:>\usr\sap\ folder and grant full access to the

SAP_LocalAdmin group and local Administrators group.

9. Create the junctions with linkd.exe as shown in the table below using the following formula, in

which source refers to the local disk and target refers to the shared disk:

linkd <source> <target>

Junctions for Existing SAP Systems Based on 7.0 SR<x>, 7.0 EHP1, or 7.1, and Higher

SAP System <Source> <Target>

All SAP systems <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\ SYS <shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\ SYS

Java system <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

SCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

SCS<Instance_Number>

ABAP system <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

ASCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

ASCS<Instance_Number>

ABAP+Java system <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

SCS<Instance_Number>

<local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

ASCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

SCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

ASCS<Instance_Number>

10. Move the cluster group SAP <SAPSID> to another node.

11. Repeat steps 4 to 9.

12. Bring the cluster group online.

Preparing the ABAP Central Instance

NOTE

As of SAP NetWeaver 7.1, the central instance is called the primary application server, although

we continue to use the term central instance for all systems mentioned here.

The following procedure applies for the:

■ Central instance of a former SAP NetWeaver '04 SR1 ABAP system that was upgraded to an SAP

system based on SAP NetWeaver 7.1, SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP1 system,

and higher

■ Central instance and SCS instance of a former SAP NetWeaver '04 SR1 based ABAP+Java system

that was upgraded to an SAP system based on SAP NetWeaver 7.1, SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SR<x>, or

SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP1 system, and higher

1. Bring the SAPMNT cluster resource offline.

2. Double-click on this resource and choose Properties, and then the Parameters tab.

3. Change the Share name from SAPMNT to SAPMNT<SAPSID>.

4. Bring the SAPLOC cluster resource offline.

5. Double-click on this resource and choose Properties, and then the Parameters tab.

6. Change the Share name from SAPLOC to SAPLOC<SAPSID>.

7. Install the Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit Tools.

8. If not available, create the folders <drive:>\usr\sap\<SAPSID> on the local disk

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 167/196

Page 168: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

CAUTION

You must create the folders on all MSCS nodes using the same local disk letter.

9. Set the file security as follows:

1. On the sap folder, add the SAP_LocalAdmin group and grant full permissions.

2. On the <SAPSID> folder, add the SAP_<SID>_LocalAdmin group and grant full permissions.

10. Create the saploc share on <local_disk:>\usr\sap\ folder and set full access to the SAP_LocalAdmin

group and local Administrators group.

11. Create the sapmnt share on the <local_disk:>\usr\sap\ folder and grant full access to the

SAP_LocalAdmin group and local Administrators group.

12. Create the junctions with linkd.exe as shown in the table below using the following formula, in

which source refers to the local disk and target refers to the shared disk:

linkd <source> <target>

Junctions for Existing 6.40 Systems

SAP System <Source> <Target>

All SAP systems <local_disk>:\usr\sap\ <SAPSID>\

SYS

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\ <SAPSID>

\ SYS

ABAP system <local_disk>:\usr\sap\ <SAPSID>\

DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\ <SAPSID>

\ DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>

ABAP+Java <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

SCS<Instance_Number>

<local_disk>:\usr\sap\ <SAPSID>\

DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\ <SAPSID>

\ SCS<Instance_Number>

<local_disk>:\usr\sap\ <SAPSID>\

DVEBMGS<Instance_Number>

13. Move the cluster group SAP-R/3 <SAPSID> to another node.

14. Repeat steps 7 to 12.

15. Bring the cluster group online.

8.3.5 Windows Server 2003: Preparing the Installation of Multiple SAP Systems in MSCS

With multiple SAP systems in a Microsoft cluster configuration, you require for each clustered system

a separate shared disk. In addition you need the tool linkd.exe from Microsoft to create junctions.

The executable is part of the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit Tools, which you can

download from http://www.microsoft.com. Search for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Resource Kit Tools.

NOTE

You can also use the 32-bit executable for 64-bit machines.

The following figure shows the directories to create on the local and shared disks as well as the junctions

on two MSCS nodes. In this example there are three SAP systems (ABAP, Java, ABAP+Java) installed in

the same MSCS cluster.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

168/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 169: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Figure 23: Directories and Junctions for Multiple SAP Systems in MSCS

Procedure

The following steps are only required if you want to install at least two SAP systems in one MSCS

cluster.

1. If it does not exist, create the domain group: <Domain>\SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin.

2. If it does not exist, create the local groups:

SAP_LocalAdmin

SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin

3. Move the shared disk to the MSCS node where you are logged on.

4. Create the following directories on the shared disk, using the following naming conventions:

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\<instance_name><instance_number>

EXAMPLE

ABAP system:

G:\usr\sap\C11

G:\usr\sap\C11\ASCS01

Java system:

H:\usr\sap\E12

H:\usr\sap\E12\SCS02

ABAP+Java

I:\usr\sap\F13

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 169/196

Page 170: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

I:\usr\sap\F13\SCS03

I:\usr\sap\F13\ASCS04

5. Set the File security on the shared disk in the folder sap to Full control for

SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin and <Domain>\SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin.

6. Set the File security on the shared disk in the folder usr to Full control for

SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin.

7. Create the following directories on the local disk of the MSCS node you are logged on for each

SAP system you want to install in a Microsoft cluster:

<local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>

EXAMPLE

C:\usr\sap\C11

C:\usr\sap\E12

C:\usr\sap\F13

Move the groups containing the shared disk to the MSCS node you are logged on.

8. Create junctions on the local hard disk of this MSCS node with linkd.exe as shown in the table

below using the following command:

linkd <source> <target>.

SAP System <Source> <Target>

All SAP systems <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS <shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS

Java system <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS\

SCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS\

SCS<Instance_Number>

ABAP system <local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

ASCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

ASCS<Instance_Number>

ABAP+Java system

<local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

SCS<Instance_Number>

<local_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>

\ASCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

SCS<Instance_Number>

<shared_disk>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\

ASCS<Instance_Number>

The following example shows the parameters you have to use for creating the junctions to install

the three SAP systems, shown in the figure above.

EXAMPLE

ABAP system:

linkd C:\usr\sap\C11\SYS G:\usr\sap\C11\SYS

linkd C:\usr\sap\C11\ASCS01 G:\usr\sap\C11\ASCS01

Java system:

linkd C:\usr\sap\E12\SYS H:\usr\sap\E12\SYS

linkd C:\usr\sap\E12\SCS02 H:\usr\sap\E12\SCS02

ABAP+Java system:

linkd C:\usr\sap\F13\SYS I:\usr\sap\F13\SYS

linkd C:\usr\sap\F13\SCS03 I:\usr\sap\F13\SCS03

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.3 Preparation

170/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 171: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

linkd C:\usr\sap\F13\ASCS04 I:\usr\sap\F13\ASCS04

9. If they do not yet exist, create the saploc and sapmnt share on the <local_disk:>\usr\sap\ folder

and grant Full Control to the SAP_LocalAdmin group and local Administrators group.

10. Create the SAP<SAPSID> cluster group and add the relevant shared disk.

11. Repeat steps 3 to 9 on the other MSCS nodes.

NOTE

sapmnt and saploc point to the local disk of each node.

8.4 Installation

The following sections provide information about how to install the SAP system for MSCS. For a

complete list of all steps, see section Installation in the Installation Checklist for a High-Availability System [page

143].

8.4.1 Configuring the First MSCS Node

The following procedure describes how to configure the first MSCS node.

When you run the First Cluster Node option it:

■ Installs the central services instance for ABAP (ASCS) and prepares this host as the SAP global host

■ Creates the SAP cluster group and adds the ASCS instance to the SAP cluster group

■ Installs the enqueue replication server instance (ERS) for the ASCS instance

■ Installs the host agent

CAUTION

When you reboot during the conversion to MSCS [page 183], resources fail over to the other MSCS node.

Therefore, after each reboot you have to return the system to the state it was in before the reboot.

Prerequisites

■ You are logged on to the first MSCS node as domain administrator or as a local user with domain

administration rights. For more information, see Performing a Domain Installation without being a Domain

Administrator [page 107].

■ Multi-SID, Windows Server 2003 only: Make sure that you have prepared your system for the installation

of multiple SAP systems [page 168].

■ The ASCS installation drive must be online on the first MSCS node.

■ You must install the ASCS instance on a shared disk, and the ERS instance and host agent on a

local disk.

Procedure

1. Run SAPinst and choose:

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.4 Installation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 171/196

Page 172: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

<Your SAP product> <SAP technical stack> <Database> High-Availability System First MSCS

Node

NOTE

If SAPinst prompts you to log off from your system, log off, and log on again.

2. Enter the required parameter values.

NOTE

■ For more information about the input parameters, position the cursor on a parameter

and press F1 in SAPinst.

■ If you have a Microsoft cluster configuration with more than two nodes in one cluster,

you have to configure the ASCS instance on two nodes only. These are also the nodes

where you install the enqueue replication server.

■ Multi-SID, Windows Server 2003 only: Enter the SAP system ID and instance numbers

as prepared [page 168] when setting up the links.

The instance number must be unique and not already used by another SAP system.

8.4.2 Installing the Database Instance on an MSCS Node

The following procedure describes how to install the database instance on an MSCS Node.

Prerequisites

■ You must have domain administrator rights.

■ You have moved all groups to the first MSCS node.

Procedure

1. On the first MSCS node, run SAPinst [page 72] and choose <Your SAP System> <SAP technical

stack> <Database> High-Availability System Database Instance .

2. Follow the instructions in the SAPinst dialogs and enter the required parameter values.

1. For the profile UNC path, you have to use the virtual (A)SCS host name, for example:

\\<SAPGLOBALHOST>\sapmnt\<SAPSID>\SYS\profile.

2. When SAPinst prompts you for the database host, make sure that you enter the virtual

database host.

CAUTION

By default, SAPinst locates the directories for the database, log files, diagnostic data, and

temporary tablespaces on the last available drive. If this is a local drive, you must specify

that these directories reside on a shared disk.

NOTE

For more information about the input parameters, position the cursor on a parameter

and press the F1 key in SAPinst.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.4 Installation

172/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 173: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. On the exit step Now cluster your database with db2mscs, continue as follows:

1. Install the database software on the second MSCS node as described in Preparing the Additional

Node for MSCS [page 173].

2. Configure the Database for MSCS [page 174].

3. Create a Share Resource called db2dump<DBSID> in group DB2 <DBSID> Group as follows:

1. In the group DB2 <DBSID> Group, choose Create New Resource and select the following

parameters:

Parameter Value

Name db2dump<DBSID>

Resource type File Share

Resource dependencies <shared drive, for log files>

Share name db2dump<DBSID>

Path <shared drive, for log files>:\db2\<DBSID>\db2dump

2. Bring the new resource db2dump<DBSID> online.

4. Pause all additional cluster nodes using the cluster administrator.

4. To continue the installation, choose OK.

NOTE

If you have canceled the installation, restart SAPinst.

5. After SAPinst has finished the installation successfully, resume all additional cluster nodes using

the cluster administrator.

6. On all additional cluster nodes, update file etc\services with the following line:

sapdb2<DBSID> <service number>

Use the same value as on the first cluster node.

7. To install the table function for the DBA Cockpit, apply SAP Note 978319.

For the UNC path, you must use the virtual ASCS host name.

8.4.3 Preparing the Additional Node for MSCS

Procedure

1. Install the DB2 database software on each cluster node as well as the latest Fix Pack (see SAP

Note 101809 for more information):

1. Copy the file ..\ESE\win_ese.rsp from the RDBMS DVD to a local directory.

2. Edit the file win_ese.rsp as follows:

■ Replace @DB2SOFTWAREPATH@

with

<local_drive_for_database_software>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\db2_software.

■ Replace @DBSID@ with <DBSID>.

■ Replace @DOMAIN@ with <WIN_DOMAIN_NAME>

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.4 Installation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 173/196

Page 174: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

where <WIN_DOMAIN_NAME> is the Windows domain name of this domain installation.

3. Change to the local directory to which you copied file win_ese.rsp.

4. Enter the following command:

<Fully_qualified_RDBMS_DVD_path>\ESE\image\setup /i en /m /u win_ese.rsp

2. DB2 V9.1 only:

Enable extended security for DB2 on each cluster node by opening a command prompt and entering

the following commands:

db2icrt dummy

db2extsec —a <WIN_DOMAIN_NAME>\DB2ADMNS_<DBSID> —u <WIN_DOMAIN_NAME>

\DB2USERS_<DBSID>

db2idrop dummy

where <WIN_DOMAIN_NAME> is the Windows domain name of this domain installation.

8.4.4 Configuring the Database for MSCS

The db2mscs utility makes the database aware of the cluster. You find the template db2mscs.eee file

in the DB2 software directory \\<DB2_SOFTWARE_PATH>\cfg. The db2mscs.eee file contains an example

of the configuration as well as an explanation of all parameters.

Prerequisites

■ The DB2 instance must be stopped

■ You must have domain administrator rights.

■ Windows Server 2008 only:

When the Windows Server 2008 failover cluster is performed, a computer object representing the

new cluster is created in the active directory of the domain.

If you cluster an instance with multiple partitions and the DB2_EXTSECURITY registry variable is set

to YES, you must add this computer object to the DB2ADMNS_<DBSID> group so that the DB2

resource DLL can access the \\NetName\DB2MSCS-DB2\DB2PROFS path.

EXAMPLE

If the name of the cluster is MYCLUSTER, a computer object MYCLUSTER is created in the active

directory of the domain and you have to add it to the MYDOMAIN\DB2ADMNS_<DBSID> group.

■ You have moved all groups to the first MSCS node.

■ Complete the information in the db2mscs.eee file according to the following table:

Parameter Example Value or Description

DB2_INSTANCE DB2<DBSID>

DB2_LOGON_USERNAME The user of the domain account of the DB2 service.

DB2_LOGON_PASSWORD The password of the domain account of the DB2 service.

CLUSTER_NAME Cluster name

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.4 Installation

174/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 175: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Parameter Example Value or Description

GROUP_NAME DB2 <DBSID> Group

DB2_NODE The node number of the database partition server to be included in the current MSCS group.

IP_NAME DB2 IP <DBSID>

IP_ADDRESS IP address of virtual DB2 server

IP_SUBNET Subnet mask of virtual DB2 server

IP_NETWORK Network name used to communicate

NETNAME_NAME DB2 NetName <DBSID>

NETNAME_VALUE Host name of virtual DB2 server

NETNAME_DEPENDENCY DB2 IP <DBSID>

DISK_NAME Resource name of shared disk containing database files

DISK_NAME More disks containing database files

INSTPROF_DISK Instance directory <shared drive>:\<inst_dir>

NOTE

This parameter is optional.

Procedure

1. Switch the default DB2 copy to SAPDB2<DBSID> using the db2swtch utility.

2. Open a command window and change to your installation directory.

3. Call the db2mscs utility.

The utility should create a cluster group with the name <GROUP_NAME>. You can check this using the

cluster administrator.

8.4.5 Configuring the Additional MSCS Node

This procedure describes how to configure the additional MSCS node.

When you run the Additional Cluster Node option it:

■ Configures the additional cluster node to run the SAP cluster group

■ Installs the enqueue replication server instance (ERS) for the ASCS instance

■ Installs the host agent

CAUTION

■ You must install the ERS and host agent on a local disk.

■ When you reboot during the conversion to MSCS [page 183], resources fail over to the other MSCS

node. Therefore, after each reboot you have to return the system to the state it was in before

the reboot.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.4 Installation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 175/196

Page 176: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Prerequisites

■ You are logged on to the additional cluster node as domain administrator or as a domain user

who is a local administrator on all cluster nodes. For more information, see Performing a Domain

Installation without being a Domain Administrator [page 107].

■ You have already performed the First Cluster Node [page 171] option.

■ Multi-SID, Windows Server 2003 only: You have already prepared your system for the installation of

multiple SAP systems [page 168].

Procedure

1. Run SAPinst and choose:

<Your SAP product> <SAP technical stack> <Database> High-Availability System Additional MSCS

Node

NOTE

If SAPinst prompts you to log off from your system, log off and log on again.

2. Enter the required parameter values.

NOTE

■ For more information about the input parameters, position the cursor on the parameter

and press F1 in SAPinst.

■ Multi-SID, Windows Server 2003 only:

● On the SAPinst screen SAP System > MSCS Cluster select the following checkbox: Support

of multiple SAP systems in one MSCS cluster?

● Enter the SAP system ID and instance numbers as prepared [page 168] when setting up

the links.

The instance number must be unique and not already used by another SAP system.

When you have made all required entries, SAPinst begins processing and converts the SAP instances

on the other MSCS node for operation in MSCS.

3. When SAPinst has finished, start the SAP <SAPSID> cluster group (Windows Server 2003) or service

and application (Windows Server 2008) as follows:

■ Windows Server 2003 only:

1. Open the Cluster Administrator with:

Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Cluster Administrator

2. Select the SAP cluster group and bring it online.

■ Windows Server 2008 only:

1. Open the Failover Cluster Management with:

Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Failover Cluster Management

2. Right-click the service and application SAP <SAPSID> and bring it online.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.4 Installation

176/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 177: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

8.4.6 Installing the Central Instance

The following procedure describes how to install the central instance for MSCS.

You have the following options to install the central instance:

■ You install the central instance on an MSCS node.

In this case, bring the SAP and DB2 cluster group online on this node, and make sure that the

central instance number is different from the (A)SCS instance number.

■ You install the central instance on a host outside of MSCS.

In this case, you have to install the database client software on this host.

Procedure

1. Run SAPinst [page 72] and choose:

<Your SAP product> <SAP technical stack> <Database> High-Availability System Central

Instance

2. If SAPinst prompts you to log off, choose OK and log on again.

3. Follow the instructions in the SAPinst dialogs and enter the required parameter values.

NOTE

■ For more information about the input parameters, position the cursor on a parameter

and press F1 in SAPinst.

■ If you install the central instance on an MSCS node, make sure that on the screen SAP

System > General Parameters for the:

● Profile Directory, you use the UNC path of the virtual (A)SCS host name, for example:

\\<SAPGLOBALHOST>\sapmnt\<SAPSID>\SYS\profile.

In a HA-system, the virtual host name of the (A)SCS instance is the same as the SAP

global host name.

● Installation Drive, you choose the local disk where you want to install the central

instance.

4. Check that the central instance is running.

8.4.7 Installing the Dialog Instance

You have to install at least one dialog instance for MSCS. You have the following options to install the

dialog instance:

■ You install the dialog instance on an MSCS node.

In this case, bring the SAP and DB2 cluster group online on this node, and make sure that the

dialog instance number is different from the (A)SCS instance number.

■ You install the dialog instance on a host outside of MSCS.

In this case, you have to install the database client software on this host.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.4 Installation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 177/196

Page 178: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Procedure

1. Run SAPinst [page 72] and choose:

<Your SAP product> <SAP technical stack> <Database> High-Availability System Dialog

Instance

2. If SAPinst prompts you to log off, choose OK and log on again.

3. Follow the instructions in the SAPinst dialogs and enter the required parameter values.

NOTE

■ For more information about the input parameters, position the cursor on a parameter

and press F1 in SAPinst.

■ If you install the dialog instance on an MSCS node, make sure that on the screen SAP

System > General Parameters for the:

● Profile Directory, you use the UNC path of the virtual (A)SCS host name, for example:

\\<SAPGLOBALHOST>\sapmnt\<SAPSID>\SYS\profile

In a HA-system, the virtual host name of the (A)SCS instance is the same as the SAP

global host name.

● Dialog instance, you enter the same instance number as for the central instance.

● Installation Drive, you choose the local disk where you want to install the dialog

instance.

4. When you have finished, change the instance profile of the dialog instance so that the number of

its work processes equals the number of work processes of the central instance.

5. If required, install additional dialog instances outside of MSCS.

NOTE

Make sure that on the screen SAP System > General Parameters for the Profile Directory, you use the

UNC path of the virtual (A)SCS host name, for example:

\\<SAPGLOBALHOST>\sapmnt\<SAPSID>\SYS\profile

In a HA-system, the virtual host name of the (A)SCS instance is the same as the SAP global

host name.

8.5 Post-Installation

To complete and check the installation of the SAP system for an MSCS configuration, you need to

perform the following steps, which are described in more detail in the linked sections:

1. You perform the post-installation checks for the enqueue replication server [page 179].

2. If required, you perform the general post-installation steps [page 85] listed in this guide.

3. If you want to use the DBA Cockpit in your MSCS environment, you must apply SAP Note

978319.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.5 Post-Installation

178/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 179: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

8.5.1 Post-Installation Checks for Enqueue Replication Server

The following sections describe the tests you must perform to check whether the installed enqueue

replication server works properly. For these tests you use the ENQT and ENSMON command line tools,

which allow remote access to the enqueue server statistics. Before you can use these tools you must

copy them to the remote host where the Enqueue Replication Server is running and from where you

want to start the tests.

NOTE

Make sure that you have restarted the (A)SCS instance and service cluster resources SAP

<SAPSID> <(A)SCS_instance_number> Instance and SAP <SAPSID> <(A)SCS_instance_number>

Service. You can do this either with SAPinst while performing the installation, or with the Cluster

Administrator (Windows Server 2003) or Failover Cluster Manager (Windows Server 2008 (R2)).

You perform the following steps:

1. You copy ENQT.exe and ENSMON.exe from your cluster’s binary directory on the sapmnt share \

\<host>\sapmnt\<SAPSID>\SYS\exe\<codepage>\<platform> to a directory on the remote host

from where you run the tests.

2. You check the status of the enqueue replication server with the ENSMON tool [page 179].

3. You check the fill status and ID of the lock table during failover with the ENQT tool [page 180].

8.5.1.1 Checking the Status of the Enqueue Replication Server with ENSMON

You use the ENSMON tool to check if the enqueue replication server and the enqueue server are

properly connected.

Prerequisites

■ You have started the (A)SCS instance of your SAP system.

■ You run the ENSMON tool from the host where you installed the Enqueue Replication Server.

Procedure

To check the status of the enqueue replication server enter the following command:

ensmon pf=<ERS_instance_profile> 2

where <ERS_instance_profile> is the profile created during the installation of the Enqueue

Replication Server.

■ If the enqueue replication server and the enqueue server are properly connected, the output is

similar to this:

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.5 Post-Installation

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 179/196

Page 180: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Try to connect to host <Virtual (A)SCS host> service sapdp01 get replinfo request

executed successfully

Replication is enabled in server, repl. server is connected

Replication is active

...

■ If the enqueue replication server and the enqueue server are not properly connected, the output

is similar to this:

Try to connect to host <Virtual (A)SCS host> service sapdp01 get replinfo request

executed successfully

Replication is enabled in server, but no repl. server is connected

...

8.5.1.2 Monitoring the Lock Table During Failover with ENQT

With the following tests you monitor and check the fill status and the ID of the lock table using the

ENQT tool.

Prerequisites

■ You have started the (A)SCS instance of your SAP system.

■ You run the ENQT tool from the host where you installed the Enqueue Replication Server.

CAUTION

Only use the ENQT commands stated in this procedure otherwise you might damage the

enqueue server’s lock table.

Procedure

Monitoring the Lock Table Fill Status During Failover with ENQT

1. Use the following command to fill the lock table of the enqueue server with 20 locks:

enqt pf=<ERS_instance_profile> 11 20

where <ERS_instance_profile> is the profile created during the installation of the Enqueue

Replication Server.

2. Monitor the fill status of the lock table with the following command:

enqt pf=<ERS_instance_profile> 20 1 1 9999

This command continuously reads the content of the enqueue server’s lock table and returns the

number of the table entries to the console.

3. Move the (A)SCS cluster group to another MSCS node to simulate an enqueue server failover

while running the ENQT command.

The output is similar to this:

Number of selected entries: 20

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.5 Post-Installation

180/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 181: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Number of selected entries: 20

Number of selected entries: 20

Number of selected entries: 20

Number of selected entries: 20

Number of selected entries: 0 ( enqueue server fails over)

Number of selected entries: 20 ( enqueue server is running again)

Number of selected entries: 20

Number of selected entries: 20

Number of selected entries: 20

Number of selected entries: 20

...

4. Make sure that the lock count is the same before and after the failover.

Monitoring the Lock Table ID During Failover with ENQT

1. Monitor the lock table ID during the failover with the following command:

for /l %i in (1,1,100000) do enqt pf=<ERS_instance_profile> 97

where <ERS_instance_profile> is the profile created during the installation of the Enqueue

Replication Server.

2. Move the (A)SCS cluster group to another MSCS node to simulate an enqueue server failover

while running the ENQT command.

The output is similar to this:

...

(Output before failover)

C:\WORK\HA\ENQU-Tests>enqt pf=BUG_ERS01_PCJ2EEV6 97

---REQ----------------------------------------------------------

EnqId: EnqTabCreaTime/RandomNumber = 25.10.2005 11:15:59 1130231759

/ 9288

...

(Output after failover)

C:\WORK\HA\ENQU-Tests>enqt pf=BUG_ERS01_PCJ2EEV6 97

---REQ----------------------------------------------------------

EnqId: EnqTabCreaTime/RandomNumber = 25.10.2005 11:15:59 1130231759

/ 9288

...

3. Make sure that the lock table ID (ENQID) is the same before and after the failover.

8.6 Additional Information

The following sections provide additional information about:

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.6 Additional Information

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 181/196

Page 182: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ Moving MSCS Groups or Services and Applications [page 182]

■ Rebooting During the Installation or Conversion for MSCS [page 183]

■ Starting and Stopping the SAP System in an MSCS Configuration [page 183].

8.6.1 Moving MSCS Groups or Services and Applications

During the cluster installation you have to move the database, SAP, or disk cluster groups from one

MSCS node to the other before you can continue. You use the Cluster Administrator (Windows Server

2003) or Failover Cluster Manager (Windows Server 2008 (R2)) for this.

NOTE

As of Windows Server 2008 (R2) there are the following terminology changes:

■ Cluster groups are now called services and applications.

We do not always use both names in this section.

■ The Cluster Administrator is now called Failover Cluster Manager.

Prerequisites

■ Windows Server 2003:

The groups you want to move are configured and are visible in the Cluster Administrator.

Windows Server 2008 (R2):

The services or applications you want to move are configured and are visible in the Failover Cluster

Manager.

■ For more information if you need to reboot during the installation, see Rebooting During the Installation

or Conversion for MSCS [page 183].

Procedure

The following describes the procedure when using the:

■ Cluster Administrator (Windows Server 2003)

■ Failover Cluster Manager (Windows Server 2008 (R2)

Windows Server 2003: Moving Groups with the Cluster Administrator

1. Start the Cluster Administrator with Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Cluster Administrator .

2. In the Cluster Administrator, select the group you want to move and drag it to the required MSCS

node on the left-hand pane.

3. Repeat the previous step for each group that you want to move.

Windows Server 2008 (R2): Moving Services and Applications with the Failover Cluster Manager

1. Start the Failover Cluster Manager with Start Administrative Tools Failover Cluster Manager .

2. In the Failover Cluster Manager, right click the service and application you want to move.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.6 Additional Information

182/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 183: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

3. Choose Move this service or application to another node Move to <relevant node> .

4. Repeat the previous step for each service and application that you want to move.

NOTE

You can only move disks that are assigned to Services and Applications.

The disks that are added to the cluster are automatically added to a group named Available

Storage. Although the groups Available Storage and Cluster Group exist in an MSCS cluster on Windows

Server 2008 (R2), they are not visible under Services and Applications. Therefore you cannot move

these groups with the Failover Cluster Manager.

■ To move Cluster Group, open a command prompt and enter:

cluster group “cluster group” /move

■ To move Available Storage, open a command prompt and enter:

cluster group “Available Storage” /move

8.6.2 Rebooting During the Installation or Conversion for MSCS

You only need to perform this procedure if you have to reboot during the installation of a high

availability system with MSCS. A reboot means that resources fail over to another MSCS node. To avoid

this, pause the additional MSCS node in the Cluster Administrator (Windows Server 2003) or Failover Cluster

Manager (Windows Server 2008 (R2)).

Procedure

1. Before the reboot, pause the additional MSCS nodes in the Cluster Administrator (Windows Server

2003) or Failover Cluster Manager (Windows Server 2008 (R2)).

2. After the reboot, activate the paused MSCS nodes in the Cluster Administrator (Windows Server 2003)

or Failover Cluster Manager (Windows Server 2008 (R2)).

3. If you forgot to pause the MSCS nodes before you reboot, perform the following steps:

1. After the reboot, in the Cluster Administrator (Windows Server 2003) or Failover Cluster Manager

(Windows Server 2008 (R2)), move all resources back to the original node.

2. Restart the Windows Server service.

8.6.3 Starting and Stopping the SAP System in an MSCS Configuration

The following describes how to start or stop the SAP system in an MSCS configuration with:

■ SAP MMC

With the SAP MMC you can start or stop the complete SAP system or single instances if they are

clustered or not.

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.6 Additional Information

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 183/196

Page 184: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ Cluster Administrator (Windows Server 2003) or Failover Cluster Manager (Windows Server 2008

(R2))

With the Cluster Administrator or Failover Cluster Manager, you can only start or stop clustered instances

such as the (A)SCS instance or the database instance. For all other instances, such as dialog instances

or the central instance, you must use the SAP MMC.

NOTE

You also use the Cluster Administrator or Failover Cluster Manager for all other administrative tasks

like moving clustered instances from one MSCS node to the other MSCS node.

Procedure

■ To start or stop your SAP system with the SAP MMC, see Starting and Stopping the SAP System [page

123].

■ Windows Server 2003 only:

To start or stop the clustered (A)SCS instance or the database instance with the Cluster

Administrator do the following:

1. Start the Cluster Administrator by choosing Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Cluster

Administrator .

2. To start or stop the (A)SCS instance of the SAP cluster group, right-click the relevant cluster

resource SAP <SAPSID> <instance_no> Instance and choose Bring online or Take offline.

3. To start or stop the database instance, right-click the database instance

<database_resource> and choose Bring online or Take offline.

4. Windows Server 2008 (R2) only:

To start or stop the clustered (A)SCS instance or the database instance with the Failover Cluster

Manager do the following:

1. Start the Failover Cluster Manager by choosing Start Administrative Tools Failover Cluster

Manager .

2. To start or stop the (A)SCS instance, select the relevant service and application SAP

<SAPSID>.

In the right-hand pane, under Other Resources, right-click the resource SAP <SAPSID>

<instance_no> Instance and choose Bring this resource online or Take this resource offline.

3. To start or stop the database instance, right-click the database instance

<database_resource> and choose Bring this resource online or Take this resource offline.End of: HA (MSCS) |

8 High Availability with Microsoft Cluster Service

8.6 Additional Information

184/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 185: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

A Appendix

A.1 Online Information from SAP

More information is available online as follows.

Documentation

Description Internet Address Title

Master Guide for SAP ERP 6.0 including SAP enhancement package 5

http://service.sap.com /erp-inst SAP ERP 6.0 SAP enhancement packages for SAP ERP 6.0

SAP enhancement package <current version> for SAP ERP 6.0

Master Guide — SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 Powered by SAP NetWeaver Using SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 and SAP NetWeaver 7 including Enhancement Package 2

Master Guide for SAP ERP 6.0

http://service.sap.com /erp-inst SAP ERP 6.0

Master Guide — SAP ERP 6.0 Using SAP NetWeaver 7.0

Master Guide SAP Solution Manager 7.0

http://service.sap.com/instguides SAP Components SAP Solution Manager Release 7.0

Master Guide – SAP Solution Manager 7.0

Database administration guide for SAP systems on IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

http://service.sap.com/operationsnw70

Database-Specific GuidesDatabase Administration Guide – SAP on IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

Installation of SAP Solution Manager

http://service.sap.com /instguides SAP Components SAP Solution Manager <Release>

Installation Guide – SAP Solution Manager <Release> on <OS>: <Database>

Configuration of SAP Solution Manager 7.0 EHP1

http://service.sap.com /instguides SAP Components SAP Solution Manager Release 7.0 EHP1

Configuration Guide – SAP Solution Manager 7.0 EHP1

Patching of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 scenarios

http://service.sap.com /maintenanceNW70

SPS <current stack> Support Package Stack Guide – SPS <current stack>

Support Package Stack Guide – SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SPS <current stack>

Installation of Multiple Components in One Database (MCOD) and its availability on different platforms

http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/dbos

Multiple Components in One Database (MCOD)Multiple Components in One Database (MCOD)

Installation of SAP NetWeaver Developer Workplace

http://service.sap.com /installNW70

Installation Installation – Clients Installation – SAP Developer Workplace <release>

Installation Guide – Developer Workplace for SAP NetWeaver

Installation of SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio

http://service.sap.com /installNW70

Installation Installation – Clients Installation – SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio

SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio – Standalone Installation Guide

A Appendix

A.1 Online Information from SAP

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 185/196

Page 186: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Description Internet Address Title

Configuration of the System Landscape Directory (SLD)

http://service.sap.com /installNW70

Configuration Post-Installation Guide - SLD of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP 2

Post-Installation Guide – System Landscape Directory of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 EHP 2

Installation of a standalone gateway

http://service.sap.com /installNW70

Installation – Standalone Engines Installation – Gateway on <platform>

Installation Guide – Gateway on <platform> – For SAP Systems Based on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2

Installation of a Web Dispatcher

http://service.sap.com /installNW70

Installation – Standalone Engines Installation – Web Dispatcher on <platform>

Installation Guide – Web Dispatcher on <platform> – For SAP Systems Based on SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2

Front End installation http://service.sap.com /installNW70

Installation – Clients SAP Front End InstallationSAP Front End Installation Guide <Current Release>This guide is also available on the Presentation DVD.

Homogeneous and heterogeneous system copy

http://service.sap.com /installNW70

Installation – SAP NetWeaver Systems System Copy for SAP Systems Based on <Release> <Technology>

System Copy Guide – System Copy for SAP Systems based on SAP NetWeaver <Release> <Technology>

SAP NetWeaver Problem Analysis Guide

http://help.sap.com/nw70 SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Library (including Enhancement Package 2) English

SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Solution Life Cycle Management by Key Capability SAP NetWeaver Problem Analysis Guide (PAG)

SAP NetWeaver Problem Analysis Guide (PAG)

General Quick Links

Description Internet Address

SAP Help Portal http://help.sap.com

SAP NetWeaver Library in SAP Help Portal

http://help.sap.com/nw70

SAP ERP Library in SAP Help Portal http://help.sap.com/erp

SAP Notes http://service.sap.com/notes

SAP Notes for SAP NetWeaver 7.0 installation

http://service.sap.com/sapnotesnw70

Forums, blogs, and general information related to all of the supported databases and operating system platforms

http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/dbos

Product Availability Matrix (PAM) for supported operating system releases

http://service.sap.com/pam

General information, forums, and blogs about information related to SAP on Windows

http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/windows

Release notes http://service.sap.com/releasenotes

A Appendix

A.1 Online Information from SAP

186/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 187: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Description Internet Address

Unicode SAP systems and their availability

http://service.sap.com/unicode

System sizing (Quick Sizer tool) http://service.sap.com/sizing

SAP NetWeaver capabilities http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/netweaver

Life-cycle management for SAP NetWeaver

http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/lcm

Landscape design for SAP NetWeaver

http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/landscapedesign

Application management for SAP NetWeaver

http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/applicationmanagement

High Availability http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/ha

System Landscape Directory http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/nw-sld

Software logistics for SAP NetWeaver

http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/softwarelogistics

SAP NetWeaver operations http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/operations

SAP NetWeaver Development Infrastructure

http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/nw-di

Security for SAP NetWeaver http://sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/security

NOTE

For information on Windows operating system security, see:http://www.microsoft.com/security

Information on SAP Support Package Stacks

http://service.sap.com/sp-stacks

SAP Solution Manager http://service.sap.com/solutionmanager

Maintenance Optimizer http://service.sap.com/solman-mopz

End-to-End Root Cause Analysis http://service.sap.com/diagnostics

A.2 Online Information from IBM

The following tables provide information about how you can access IBM DB2 manuals and the

respective online documentation for your database.

IBM Manuals

Database Version Internet Address

DB2 V9.7 http://www-01.ibm.com/support /docview.wss?rs=71&uid=swg27015148

DB2 V9.5 http://www-1.ibm.com/support/ docview.wss?rs=71&uid=swg27009727

DB2 V9.1 http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support/ manualsv9.html

IBM DB2 Information Center

Database Version Internet Address

DB2 9.7 http://publib.boulder.ibm.com /infocenter/db2luw/v9r7/index.jsp

A Appendix

A.2 Online Information from IBM

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 187/196

Page 188: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Database Version Internet Address

DB2 V9.5 http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v9r5/

DB2 V9.1 http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/ db2luw/v9/index.jsp

NOTE

The IBM DB2 Information Center also contains a detailed glossary explaining all IBM-specific

terms.

More Information

For more information about web sites that contain important DB2-related documentation, see SAP

Note 690471.

A Appendix

A.2 Online Information from IBM

188/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 189: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Typographic Conventions

Example Description

<Example> Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system, for example, “Enter your <User Name>”.

ExampleExample

Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path, for example, menu options

Example Emphasized words or expressions

Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation

http://www.sap.com Textual cross-references to an internet address

/example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web

123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note, for example, SAP Note 123456

Example ■ Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include field labels, screen titles, pushbutton labels, menu names, and menu options.

■ Cross-references to other documentation or published works

Example ■ Output on the screen following a user action, for example, messages ■ Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program ■ File and directory names and their paths, names of variables and parameters, and

names of installation, upgrade, and database tools

EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, database table names, and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE

EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 189/196

Page 190: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16

69190 WalldorfGermany

T +49/18 05/34 34 34F +49/18 05/34 34 20

www.sap.com

© Copyright 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z10, System z9, z10, z9, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, eServer, z/VM, z/OS, i5/OS, S/390, OS/390, OS/400, AS/400, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, PowerVM, Power Architecture, POWER6+, POWER6, POWER5+, POWER5, POWER, OpenPower, PowerPC, BatchPipes, BladeCenter, System Storage, GPFS, HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF, Redbooks, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.SAP, R/3, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP Business ByDesign, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (“SAP Group”) for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

DisclaimerSome components of this product are based on Java™. Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable and severe malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited, as is any decompilation of these components.Any Java™ Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAP’s Support Services and may not be modified or altered in any way.

190/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 191: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Legal Software Terms.

Terms for Included Open Source Software

This SAP software contains also the third party open source software products listed below. Note that for these third party products the following special terms and conditions shall apply.1. This software was developed using ANTLR.2. SAP License Agreement for STLport

SAP License Agreement for STLPort betweenSAP AktiengesellschaftSystems, Applications, Products in Data ProcessingDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 Walldorf, Germany(hereinafter: SAP)andyou(hereinafter: Customer)1. Subject Matter of the Agreement

1. SAP grants Customer a non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free license to use the STLport.org C++ library (STLport) and its documentation without fee.

2. By downloading, using, or copying STLport or any portion thereof Customer agrees to abide by the intellectual property laws, and to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

3. The Customer may distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or modified) without any royalties or restrictions.

4. Customer shall maintain the following copyright and permissions notices on STLport sources and its documentation unchanged: Copyright 2001 SAP AG

5. The Customer may distribute original or modified STLport sources, provided that: ■ The conditions indicated in the above permissions notice are met; ■ The following copyright notices are retained when present, and conditions provided in accompanying

permission notices are met:Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard CompanyCopyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc.Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.Copyright 1999,2000 Boris FomitchevCopyright 2001 SAP AG

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purposes is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purposes is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Moscow Center for SPARC makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.Boris Fomitchev makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own risk. Permission to use or copy this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the above notices are retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a notice that the code was modified is included with the above copyright notice.

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 191/196

Page 192: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purposes is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. SAP makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided with a limited warranty and liability as set forth in the License Agreement distributed with this copy. SAP offers this liability and warranty obligations only towards its customers and only referring to its modifications.

2. Support and MaintenanceSAP does not provide software maintenance for the STLport. Software maintenance of the STLport therefore shall be not included.All other services shall be charged according to the rates for services quoted in the SAP List of Prices and Conditions and shall be subject to a separate contract.

3. Exclusion of warrantyAs the STLport is transferred to the Customer on a loan basis and free of charge, SAP cannot guarantee that the STLport is error-free, without material defects or suitable for a specific application under third-party rights. Technical data, sales brochures, advertising text and quality descriptions produced by SAP do not indicate any assurance of particular attributes.

4. Limited Liability1. Irrespective of the legal reasons, SAP shall only be liable for damage, including unauthorized operation, if this

(i) can be compensated under the Product Liability Act or (ii) if caused due to gross negligence or intent by SAP or (iii) if based on the failure of a guaranteed attribute.

2. If SAP is liable for gross negligence or intent caused by employees who are neither agents or managerial employees of SAP, the total liability for such damage and a maximum limit on the scope of any such damage shall depend on the extent to which its occurrence ought to have anticipated by SAP when concluding the contract, due to the circumstances known to it at that point in time representing a typical transfer of the software.

3. In the case of Art. 4.2 above, SAP shall not be liable for indirect damage, consequential damage caused by a defect or lost profit.

4. SAP and the Customer agree that the typical foreseeable extent of damage shall under no circumstances exceed EUR 5,000.

5. The Customer shall take adequate measures for the protection of data and programs, in particular by making backup copies at the minimum intervals recommended by SAP. SAP shall not be liable for the loss of data and its recovery, notwithstanding the other limitations of the present Art. 4 if this loss could have been avoided by observing this obligation.

6. The exclusion or the limitation of claims in accordance with the present Art. 4 includes claims against employees or agents of SAP.

3. Adobe Document ServicesAdobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and / or other countries. For information on Third Party software delivered with Adobe document services and Adobe LiveCycle Designer, see SAP Note 854621.

4. Apache License, Version 2.01. Definitions:

■ "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

■ "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

■ "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

■ "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. ■ "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software

source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

192/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 193: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

■ "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

■ "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

■ "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

■ "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

■ "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright LicenseSubject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent LicenseSubject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

4. RedistributionYou may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,

trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works

2010-12-20 PUBLIC 193/196

Page 194: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

5. Submission of ContributionsUnless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. TrademarksThis License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of WarrantyUnless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of LiabilityIn no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional LiabilityWhile redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address: http://service.sap.com/instguides

194/196 PUBLIC 2010-12-20

Page 195: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)
Page 196: Inst Guide - Sap Erp Ehp5 - Windows - Db2 (Abap)

SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +49/18 05/34 34 34F +49/18 05/34 34 20www.sap.com

© Copyright 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.